2006 Accord Coupe Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction..................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety ..........................................................................................................................ii
Your Vehicle at a Glance...............................................................................................................................3
Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................53
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................105
How t
o operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving ..............................................................................................................................
...............183
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving...........................................................................................................................................................197
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................219
T
he Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................263
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information...............................................................................................................................287
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)......................................................................301
A summary
of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................305
How t
o order manuals and other technical literature.
Index .................................................................................................................................................................I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
This owner’s manual should be
considered a permanent part of the
vehicle and should remain with the
vehicle when it is sold.
The information and specifications
included in this publication were in
effect at the time of approval for
printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications
or design at any time without notice
and without incurring any obligation
whatsoever.
This owner’s manual covers all
models of the Accord Coupe. You
may find descriptions of equipment
and features that are not on your
particular model.
Owner’s Identification
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
０５／０７／２７ １５：２６：０６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０００１
Main Menu
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains
or emits chemicals known to the
state of California to cause cancer
and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or
more recording devices commonly
referred to as event data recorders
or sensing and diagnostic modules.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2006 Honda Accord was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the
instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will
be pleased to answer any questions and concerns.
Introduction
WARNING:
i
０５／０７／２７ １５：２６：１３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０００２
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
on the vehicle.
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
These signal words mean:
AFewWordsAboutSafety
Safety Labels
Safety Messages
Safety Headings
Safety Section
Instructions
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
ii
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
０５／０７／２７ １５：２６：２６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０００３
Main Menu
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
3
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
MIRROR CONTROLS
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
GAUGES
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P.63)
CLOCK
(P.55,56)
FRONT PASSENGER’S
AIRBAG
(P.9, 23)
(P.100)
(P.91)
(P.77)
(P.95)
(P.9, 23)
A/T model is shown.
(P.124)
(P.173)
(P.108)
(P.113, 117)
(P.203)
(P.200)
(P.186)
(P.81)
FUEL FILL DOOR(P.185)/
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
０５／０７／２７ １５：２７：０６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０００６
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
If equipped.
To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
3:
1:
2:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
HAZARD
WARNING
BUTTON
PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.68)
(P.29)
(P.71)
(P.72)
HORN
TILT/TELESCOPIC
ADJUSTMENT
(P.73)
(P.90)
SEAT HEATERS
VOICE CONTROL SWITCHES
(P.69)
(P.94)
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
MOONROOF SWITCH
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
(P.71)
CRUISE
CONTROLS
(P.171)
(P.175)
EX-V6 model without navigation system is shown.
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST OFF SWITCH
(P.212)
1
2
3
2
2
０５／０７／２７ １５：２７：１６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０００７
Main Menu
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 13
5. Fasten and Position the
.............................Seat Belts . 14
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 15
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15
...Additional Safety Precautions . 16
Additional Information About
.......................Your Seat Belts . 17
..Seat Belt System Components . 17
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 18
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 19
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 19
Additional Information About
...........................Your Airbags . 21
......Airbag System Components . 21
......... 23
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 28
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
How the Passenger Airbag
...............Off Indicator Works . 29
.............................Airbag Service . 30
...Additional Safety Precautions . 31
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 32
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 32
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 33
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 33
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 35
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 35
...Additional Safety Precautions . 36
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 37
.......................Protecting Infants . 37
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 39
....................Installing a Child Seat . 40
...............................With LATCH . 41
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 43
..............................With a Tether . 45
...........Protecting Larger Children . 46
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 46
..................Using a Booster Seat . 47
..When Can a Child Sit in Front . 48
...Additional Safety Precautions . 49
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 50
...................................Safety Labels . 51
How Your Front Airbags Work
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
０５／０７／２７ １５：２７：２１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０００８
Main Menu
−
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).
14
32
49
221
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Control Your Speed
Don’t Drink and Drive
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
Restrain All Children
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
6
０５／０７／２７ １５：２７：３５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０００９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passengers.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(6)
(9)
(6)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Side Curtain Airbags
(10) Door Locks
(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
０５／０７／２７ １５：２７：４４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００１０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Always wear your seat belt, and
make sure you wear it properly.In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Your seat belt system also
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Seat Belts
What You Should Do:
Why Wear Seat Belts
8
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
０５／０７／２７ １５：２７：５９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００１１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
Your vehicle has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact (see
page for more information on how
your side airbags work).
Your vehicle also has side curtain
airbags to help protect the heads of
the driver, front passenger, and
passengers in the outer rear seating
positions during a moderate to
severe side impact (see page for
more information on how your side
curtain airbags work).
26
28
23
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
０５／０７／２７ １５：２８：０７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００１２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
To do
their job, airbags must inflate with
tremendous force. So while
airbags help save lives, they can
cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
Airbags can pose hazards.
What you should do:
10
０５／０７／２７ １５：２８：１５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００１３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front.
See pages
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed
and locked.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
Your vehicle has a door and
trunk open monitor on the
instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door or the trunk is
not tightly closed.
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door
and trunk open monitor works.
32 39 for important
77
61
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Adjust the Front Seats
Close and Lock the Doors1.
2.
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
０５／０７／２７ １５：２８：３０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００１４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel in and out (see page
). Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
front seats.
73
82
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
12
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
０５／０７／２７ １５：２８：４０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００１５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Have passengers with adjustable
head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See pages and for how to
adjust the seat-backs.
8482
87
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Head Restraints4.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
０５／０７／２７ １５：２８：５０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００１６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
This spreads the force of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
17
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
5.
14
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
０５／０７／２７ １５：２９：０１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００１７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults and Teens
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
Advice for Pregnant Women6.
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
０５／０７／２７ １５：２９：１０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００１８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a f ront
airbag.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Additional Safety Precautions
16
０５／０７／２７ １５：２９：２０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００１９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all five seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
This system monitors the front seat
belts.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before your seat
belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a small child is
riding there, the indicator will not
come on and the beeper will not
sound.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt while driving, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
The seat belts use the same
monitoring system as the front
airbags. The system may not work
properly under these conditions:
Placing heavy items on the front
passenger’s seat.
The front passenger is not sitting
properly.
The front passenger’s seat-back is
pressed forward by a folded-down
rear seat.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer if the indicator comes on or
the beeper sounds when there is no
front passenger or objects on the
front seat.
Seat Belt System Components
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
０５／０７／２７ １５：２９：３２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００２０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the seat belt, pull it out only
as far as needed.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page )
14
43
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Lap/Shoulder Belt
18
０５／０７／２７ １５：２９：４０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００２１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions,
andtheyshouldactivateinany
collision severe enough to cause
front airbag inflation.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
manner.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Honda provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts for U.S. models. See
your
booklet for details.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. Any belt that
is not in good condition or working
properly may not provide adequate
protection and should be replaced as
soon as possible.
do not deploy
Honda Warranty Information
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt Maintenance
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
０５／０７／２７ １５：２９：５０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００２２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page. 251
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
20
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
０５／０７／２７ １５：２９：５６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００２３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your airbag system includes:
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see pag e ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see pag e ).
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).28
23
26
CONTINUED
Airbag System Components
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(6)
(4)
(7)
(8)
(10)
(5)
(12)
(14)
(13)
(14)
(13)
(1) Driver’s Airbag
(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(11) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(14) Side Curtain Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(10) Side Impact Sensors (First)
０５／０７／２７ １５：３０：０７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００２４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact or
side impact.
Sensors that can detect whether a
child is in the passenger’s side
airbag path and automatically turn
the airbag off (see page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. These automatically turn off
the passenger’s front airbag if
they detect an infant or a small
childmaybeintheseat(seepage
).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
19
29
25
29
29
25
28
Additional Information About Your Airbags
22
０５／０７／２７ １５：３０：１８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００２５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After inflating, the front airbags will
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed. 25
CONTINUED
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
０５／０７／２７ １５：３０：２９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００２６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
or not the occupant is wearing a seat
belt.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
Additional Information About Your Airbags
24
０５／０７／２７ １５：３０：３８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００２７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any cargo or metal objects
under the front seats.
Back-seat passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in the front, if
the sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child, the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
CONTINUED
Advanced Airbags
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
０５／０７／２７ １５：３０：５１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００２８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
When the airbag is turned off, an
indicator in the center of the
dashboard will come on indicating
passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page
).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
If the weight sensors detect there is
no passenger in the front seat, the
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will
not come on.
Moving the front seat forcibly
back on the folded rear seat.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
Also,makesurethefloormat
behind the front passenger’s seat
is hooked to the floor mat anchor
(see page ). If it is not, the mat
may interfere with the proper
operation of the sensors and
operation of the seat.
A rear passenger pushing or
pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will
work properly,
This includes:
Folding the rear seat-back onto a
reclined front passenger’s seat-
back.
29
251
How Your Side Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
do not do anything
that would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat.
26
０５／０７／２７ １５：３１：０３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００２９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, this system
is designed to shut off the side
airbag if a child leans into the side
airbag’s path.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your vehicle has
an automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
29
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
０５／０７／２７ １５：３１：１４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００３０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid deceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on for several seconds then
goes off. This tells you the system is
working properly.
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
How the SRS Indicator Works
Additional Information About Your Airbags
28
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
０５／０７／２７ １５：３１：２６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００３１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does
mean there is a problem with your
side airbags.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work when you need them.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on for several seconds
andthengooff(seepage ).Ifit
doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
on while driving without a passenger
in the front seat, have the system
checked.
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect the weight of an infant or
small child on the front passenger’s
seat. It does mean there is a
problem with the airbag.
58
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not
not
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
U.S. Canada
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
U.S. Canada
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
０５／０７／２７ １５：３１：３６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００３２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your airbag systems are virtually
maintenance free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
If no one is riding in the front seat,
the airbag will be automatically shut
off. However, the indicator will not
come on.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by your dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during the crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may also come on and off repeatedly
if total weight on the seat is near the
airbag cutoff threshold.
If this happens, have the passenger
ride properly restrained in the back
seat. If the passenger must ride in
front, move the seat as far to the
rear as possible, have the passenger
sit upright and wear the seat belt
properly.
If the indicator comes on with no
passenger in the front, or with an
adult in the seat, there may be a
problem with the advanced airbag
system. Have the vehicle checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. If a
front airbag inflates, the seat belt
tensioners must also be replaced.
Airbag Service
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
An airbag ever inflates.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
30
０５／０７／２７ １５：３１：４８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００３３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Honda
Automobile Customer Service at
(800) 999-1009.
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
If water or another liquid
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag cutoff
system from working properly.
This will cause the
front passenger’s weight sensors
to work improperly. The system
mayshutoffthefrontpassenger’s
airbag and the passenger airbag
off indicator will come on. The
seat belt reminder indicator for a
front seat passenger may also
work improperly.
Make sure that the folded-down
rear seat does not press the front
passenger’s seat-back. Check the
passenger airbag off indicator to
confirm that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag is operating
properly.
Additional Safety Precautions
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Do not remove or modify a front
seat without consulting your
dealer.
Do not cover or replace f ront seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to liquid.
Do not recline the front passenger’s
seat-back as far to the rear as
possible with the right rear seat
folded down.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
０５／０７／２７ １５：３１：５６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００３４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
37 45
46 49
properly
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
32
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
０５／０７／２７ １５：３２：０６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００３５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ),
please follow these guidelines:
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children age 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
29
46
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
Small Children
Placing a f orward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s f ront airbag can
be hazardous.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inf lating passenger’s
front airbag.Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s f ront airbag.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
０５／０７／２７ １５：３２：１８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００３６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
U.S. Models
Protecting Children General Guidelines
34
SUN VISOR
SUN VISOR
DASHBOARD
０５／０７／２７ １５：３２：３４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００３７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Your vehicle has a back seat where
children can be properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry a group of
children, and a child must ride in
front:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual
contact, we strongly recommend
that another adult ride with the
child in the back seat. The back
seat is far safer for a child than the
front.
15
14
46
82
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
０５／０７／２７ １５：３２：４５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００３８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles. Know how to
operate the emergency trunk
opener and decide if your children
should be shown how to use this
feature(seepage ).
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the trunk, which
can lead to accidental injury or
death.
81
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Lock both doors and the trunk
when your vehicle is not in use.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Keep vehicle keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
36
０５／０７／２７ １５：３２：５４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００３９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-
facing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front passenger from
moving their seat as far back as
recommended, or from locking their
seat-back in the desired position.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
CONTINUED
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the f ront
seat.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
０５／０７／２７ １５：３３：０６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００４０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Even with advanced front airbags,
which can automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
We also recommend that a small
child use the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
In any situation, we strongly
recommend that you install the child
seat directly behind the front
passenger’s seat, move the seat as
far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
25
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Placing a f orward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Child Seat Placement
Protecting Infants and Small Children
38
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
０５／０７／２７ １５：３３：１７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００４１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
seating positions in the back seat.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page ).
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
1.
2.
41
CONTINUED
Selecting a Child Seat
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Saf ety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
０５／０７／２７ １５：３３：３０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００４２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
3.
1.
2.
3.
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
The child seat should f it the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Secure the child in the child seat.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
40
０５／０７／２７ １５：３３：４２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００４３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer rear seats.
The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Rigid type
LOWER ANCHORS
BUTTON
０５／０７／２７ １５：３３：５３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００４４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
4.
5.
6.
7.
87
Installing a Child Seat
42
Flexible type
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
０５／０７／２７ １５：３４：０３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００４５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
1. 2.
3.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
０５／０７／２７ １５：３４：１３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００４６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
5.4.
Installing a Child Seat
44
０５／０７／２７ １５：３４：２０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００４７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the back seat, using the anchorage
points shown above.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), route the
tether strap over the seat-back.
Followsteps2and3fromthe
previous column.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
Lift the cover, then attach the
tether strap hook to the anchor,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
43 43
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Using the Center AnchorUsing an Outer Anchor
Installing a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
ANCHOR
TETHER
STRAP
HOOK
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS
COVER
０５／０７／２７ １５：３４：３５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００４８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
1.
2.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
46
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
０５／０７／２７ １５：３４：４５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００４９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
3.
4.
5.
39
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
０５／０７／２７ １５：３４：５６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００５０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
14 46
Maturity
Physical Size
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Protecting Larger Children
48
０５／０７／２７ １５：３５：１０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００５１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
０５／０７／２７ １５：３５：１７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００５２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. You should
have no problem with carbon
monoxide entering the vehicle in
normal driving if you maintain your
vehicle properly.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the trunk open, airflow can pull
exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk open, open all the windows and
set the heating and cooling system/
climate control system as shown
below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
50
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
０５／０７／２７ １５：３５：２６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００５３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
CONTINUED
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models only
4-cylinder LX models Except 4-cylinder LX models
Safety Labels
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
HOOD
DASHBOARD
RADIATOR CAP
０５／０７／２７ １５：３５：４５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００５４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
U.S. models
Canadian models
U.S. models Canadian models
Safety Labels
52
SUN VISOR
DOORJAMBS
０５／０７／２７ １５：３６：０２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００５５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 54
..............................Instument Panel . 55
...........Instument Panel Indicators . 57
.............................................Gauges . 63
.....................................Odometer . 63
...................................Trip Meter . 64
..................................Fuel Gauge . 64
...................Temperature Gauge . 64
Outside Temperature
...................................Indicator . 65
..........Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 65
......................Maintenance Minder . 66
Controls Near the Steering
...........................................Wheel . 67
.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 68
...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 69
Automatic Lighting Off
.....................................Feature . 70
............Daytime Running Lights . 70
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71
.................Hazard Warning Button . 71
.................Rear Window Defogger . 72
..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 73
...............................Keys and Locks . 74
........................Immobilizer System . 75
................................Ignition Switch . 76
..........................Power Door Locks . 77
.......................Remote Transmitter . 78
................................................Trunk . 81
........Emergency Trunk Opener . 81
.................................................Seats . 82
..........Manual Seat Adjustments . 82
............Power Seat Adjustments . 84
..........................Head Restraints . 87
.......................Folding Rear Seat . 88
....................................Seat Heaters . 90
..............................Power Windows . 91
.........................................Moonroof . 94
.............................................Mirrors . 95
.................................Parking Brake . 96
...........Interior Convenience Items . 97
....................................Glove Box . 98
.......................Beverage Holders . 98
...............Console Compartment . 99
.......................Center CD Pocket . 99
...............................Coin Pocket . 100
........Accessory Power Sockets . 100
...................................Sun Visor . 101
............................Vanity Mirror . 101
....................Sunglasses Holder . 102
..................................Coat Hook . 102
...............................Interior Lights . 102
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
53
０５／０７／２７ １５：３６：０７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００５６
Main Menu
Control Locations
54
MIRROR CONTROLS
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK
MASTER SWITCH
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS
GAUGES
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKETS
SEAT HEATER
SWITCH
(P.63)
CLOCK
(P.55, 56)
(P.95)
(P.77)
(P.91)
(P.90)
(P.71)
(P.100)
(P.186)
(P.124)
(P.173)
(P.108)
(P.113, 117)
FUEL FILL
DOOR(P.185)/
TRUNK
RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.81)
０５／０７／２７ １５：３６：１４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００５７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊ If equipped.:
U.S. models
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
55
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS) INDICATOR
DOOR AND TRUNK OPEN
MONITOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS
INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING INDICATORS
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SECURITY SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.57)
(P.59)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(P.60)
(P.57)
(P.57)
(P.59)
(P.60)
(P.60)
(P.58)
(P.60)
(P.58)
(P.61)
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.58)
(P.57)
(P.61)
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
(P.61)
(P.59)
(P.62)
(P.62)
(P.62)
(P.62)
EX-V6 with A/T model is shown.
０５／０７／２７ １５：３６：２４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００５８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊ If equipped.:
Canadian models
Instrument Panel
56
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS) INDICATOR
SEAT BELT REMINDER
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKE
SYSTEM INDICATOR
TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD
WARNING INDICATORS
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.57)
(P. 59)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
(p.60 )
( P.57)
(P.57)
(P.59)
(P.60)
(P.60)
(P.58)
(P.62)
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
(P.62)
(P.62)
(P.62)
(P.59)
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
(P.61)
DOOR AND TRUNK OPEN
MONITOR
(P.61)
(P.57)
(P.58)
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
WASHER LEVEL INDICATOR
(P.60)
(P.61)
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR
(P.60)
(P.58)
EX-V6 with A/T model is shown.
０５／０７／２７ １５：３６：３３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００５９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle. See page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
This indicator reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .17
277
276
276
Instrument Panel Indicators
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
57
０５／０７／２７ １５：３６：４５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００６０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator has two functions:
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page .
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you try to drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
This indicator comes on for several
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This indicator will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
side curtain airbags, automatic seat
belt tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s
weight sensors. For more
information, see page .
1.
2.
28
29
278
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Side Airbag Off Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
58
U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada
０５／０７／２７ １５：３６：５８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００６１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this indicator on, your vehicle still
has normal braking ability but no
anti-lock function. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
then go off if you have inserted a
properly-coded ignition key. If it is
not a properly-coded key, the
indicator will blink, and the engine
will not start (see page ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK
(0) position.
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the indicator does not
blink or blinks rapidly, it usually
means one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see page ). Replace
the bulb as soon as possible, since
other drivers cannot see that you are
signaling.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
blink. All turn signals on the outside
of the vehicle should flash.
75
249
209
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
59
０５／０７／２８ １７：０３：２１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００６２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator is located in the fuel
gauge. It comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
When the indicator comes on, there
are about 2.72 U.S. gal (10.3
)of
fuel remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page ).
If this indicator comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position and the parking brake is
released, it means there is a problem
in the high beam headlight’s circuit.
Have your vehicle checked by your
dealer.
When the daytime running lights
(DRL) are on, this indicator comes
on with reduced brightness (see
page ).
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .69
70 238
Canadian models only
Instrument Panel Indicators
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
Low Fuel IndicatorLights On Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
High Beam Indicator
60
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
０５／０７／２７ １５：３７：２１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００６３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator comes on when the
security system is set. For more
information, see page .
The specific door indicator comes on
in this monitor if either door is not
fully closed.
The trunk indicator comes on when
the trunk is opened or if it is not fully
closed.
All the indicators in the monitor
come on for a few seconds when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
If the remaining engine oil life is
more than 16 percent, this indicator
comes on for a few seconds when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position.
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. The
maintenance main items and sub
items will be displayed in the
information display. See page for
more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
174
221
Security System IndicatorMaintenance Minder
Indicator
Door and Trunk Open Monitor
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
61
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０５／０７／２７ １５：３７：３３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００６４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
On all V6 models On all V6 models
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
for more information on the
VSA system.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the cruise control system by
pressing the CRUISE button (see
page ).
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator has three functions:
Itcomesonasareminderthatyou
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page .
1.
2.
3.
211
211
211
175
175
Instrument Panel Indicators
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Cruise Main Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
VSA Activation Indicator
62
０５／０７／２７ １５：３７：４９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００６５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To switch the information display
between the odometer/trip meter,
outside temperature/trip meter (if
equipped), and engine oil life and
maintenance item code(s), press the
Select/Reset knob repeatedly.
This shows the total distance your
vehicle has been driven. It measures
miles in U.S. models and kilometers
in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, your last
selection appears in the display.
Gauges
Odometer
Instruments and Controls
63
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
FUEL GAUGE
SELECT/RESET
KNOB
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
U.S. A/T model is shown.
ODOMETER/TRIP METER/OUTSIDE
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR/CHECK FUEL CAP
INDICATOR/MAINTENANCE MINDER
０５／０７／２７ １５：３７：５８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００６６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise into the
upperhalfofthegauge.Ifitreaches
the red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. See page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between them by
pressing the Select/Reset knob
repeatedly. Each trip meter works
independently, so you can keep track
of two different distances.
To reset a trip meter, display it and
then press and hold the select/reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
274
Fuel Gauge Temperature GaugeTrip Meter
Gauges
64
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
０５／０７／２７ １５：３８：０７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００６７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
±±
−−
−−−
−−−
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the Select/
Reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C in
Canadian models) warmer or cooler.This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
Select/Reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the indicator
update until it reaches the correct
outside temperature. This may take
several minutes.
Select the outside temperature
indicator, then press the Select/
Reset knob for 10 seconds. The
following sequence will appear for 1
secondeach:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5, 4,
3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,
3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).
If you fuel cap is loose or missing, a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears in the information display
after you start the engine. Turn the
engine off and confirm the fuel cap is
installed. If it is, loosen the cap, then
retighten it until it clicks at least
once. When you restart the engine,
the message appears again. To clear
the message, press and release the
Select/Reset knob.
CONTINUED
On 4-cylinder EX-L and 6-cylinder EX
models
Outside Temperature Indicator Check Fuel Cap Indicator
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
65
０５／０７／２７ １５：３８：１８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００６８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The information display shows you
the engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
If the system still detects a loose or
missing fuel fill cap, the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) comes on.
Turn the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL goes
out after 3 days of normal driving
once the cap is tightened or replaced.
If it does not go out, have your
dealer inspect the vehicle. For more
information, see page .277
221
Gauges
Maintenance Minder
66
０５／０７／２７ １５：３８：２４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００６９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
If equipped.
1:
2:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
67
EX-V6 model without navigation system is shown.
CRUISE CONTROLSTILT/TELESCOPIC ADJUSTMENT
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
AUDIO SYSTEM
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.69)
HORN
MOONROOF
SWITCH
(P.94)
(P.73)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
(P.71)
(P.68)
(P.29)
(P.71)
(P.72)
SEAT HEATERS
(P.90)
(P.171)
(P.212)
(P.124)
(P.175)
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
OFF SWITCH
1
2
2
2
０５／０７／２７ １５：３８：３３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００７０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−−
−
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers are not activated.
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring.
Ifyouturnittotheshortestdelay,
the wipers will change to low
speed operation when the vehicle
speed exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
While the vehicle is stopped and in
gear, the wipers sweep the
windshield whenever you remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers run at high speed.
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you, and
hold it. The washers spray until you
release the lever. The wipers run at
low speed, then complete one more
sweep after you release the lever.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
The length of the wiper
interval is varied automatically
according to the vehicle’s speed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6
Windshield Wipers
OFF
LO
HI
Windshield WashersMIST
INT
Windshield Wipers and Washers
68
０５／０７／２７ １５：３８：４７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００７１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Turning the
switch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turns
on the parking lights, taillights, side-
marker lights, and rear license plate
lights.
Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Turn signal
Off
Parking and interior lights
Headlights
High beams
Flashhighbeams
Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’
position turns on the headlights.
If you leave the lights on with the
key removed from the ignition
switch, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
Push the lever
forward until you hear a click to turn
on the high beams. The blue high
beam indicator will come on (see
page ). Pull the lever back to
return to the low beams.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
When the light switch is in the
‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the
lights on indicator comes on as a
reminder. This indicator stays on if
you leave the light switch on and
turn the ignition switch to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
60
Headlights On
Turn Signal
High Beams
Turn Signal and Headlights
Instruments and Controls
69
０５／０７／２７ １５：３８：５６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００７２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the
door and get out, the lights will
turn off after 10 minutes.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, the lights on indicator comes
on along with a lights-on reminder
chime.
This feature turns off the headlights,
parking lights, side marker lights,
taillights, and license plate lights
automatically under these
conditions:
If you leave the headlight switch in
the or position, remove
the key, then open and close the
driver’s door, the lights will turn
off after 15 seconds.
With the headlight switch OFF or
position, the high beam
headlights and the high beam
indicator come on with reduced
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
Automatic Lighting Off Feature Daytime Running Lights
Headlights
70
０５／０７／２７ １５：３９：０７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００７３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Select/Reset knob on the
instrument panel controls the
brightness of the instrument panel
lights. Turn the knob to adjust the
brightness.
Push the button between the center
vents to turn on the hazard warning
lights (four-way flashers). This
causes all four outside turn signals
and both turn indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.
The instrument panel will illuminate
with reduced brightness when you
open the driver’s door. The
brightness will increase slightly
when you insert the key in the
ignitionswitch,thengotonormal
brightness when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If you do not insert the key in the
ignition switch after opening the
driver’s door, the illumination turns
off about 30 seconds after you close
the door.
If you insert the key but do not turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, the illumination turns off in
about 10 seconds.
To reduce glare at night, the instru-
ment panel illumination dims when
you turn the light switch to or
. Turning the Select/Reset
knob fully to the right until you hear
a click will cancel the reduced bright-
ness.
Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button
Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button
Instruments and Controls
71
SELECT/RESET KNOB
０５／０７／２７ １５：３９：１８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００７４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator
above/in the button comes on to
show the defogger is on. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side-
to-side.
Rear Window Defogger
72
Auto A/C type shown Vehicles with navigation systemManual A/C type shown
０５／０７／２７ １５：３９：２６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００７５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Move the steering wheel up or
downandinorouttothedesired
position. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
the indicators.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up, down, in,
and out.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Instruments and Controls
73
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
０５／０７／２７ １５：３９：３４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００７６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the driver’s
door lock. You can keep the trunk
release handle, rear seat trunk
access, and glove box locked when
you leave your vehicle and the valet
key at a parking facility.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Keys and Locks
74
MASTER
KEY WITH
REMOTE
TRANSMITTER
VALET KEY
(LIGHT GREY)
KEY
NUMBER
TAG
０５／０７／２７ １５：３９：４２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００７７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you have lost your key and cannot
start your engine, contact your
dealer.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine’s fuel
system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go out. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
Immobilizer System
Instruments and Controls
75
０５／０７／２７ １５：３９：５２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００７８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, push it in slightly. If
your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
also be in park.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must be
in Park before you can remove the
key from the ignition switch.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
LOCK (0)
ACCESSORY (I)
ON (II)
START (III)
Ignition Switch
76
Removing the key from the
ignition switch while driving
locks the steering. This can
cause you to lose control.
Remove the key from the
ignition switch only when
parked.
０５／０７／２７ １５：４０：０２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００７９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Youcanopenorclosethewindows
by using the key in the driver’s door
(see page ).
The lock tab on the passenger’s door
locks and unlocks only that door.
Pulling up on the driver’s door lock
tab only unlocks the driver’s door.
Pushing the bottom of either master
door lock switch unlocks both doors.
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the vehicle, push the
lock tab down and close the door. To
lock the driver’s door, remove the
key from the ignition switch and
push the lock tab down or push the
top of the master switch, then close
the door.
To lock the doors, push the top of
the master door lock switch on
either door, press the lock tab down
on the driver’s door, or use the key
on the outside lock on the driver’s
door. To unlock only the driver’s door
from the outside, turn the key and
releaseit.Ifyouturnitagain,both
doors unlock.
With the key in the ignition switch,
you cannot lock the both doors from
the outside by both master door lock
switches or the lock tab on the
driver’s door.
93
Lockout Prevention
Power Door Locks
Instruments and Controls
77
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
LOCK TAB
０５／０７／２７ １５：４０：１３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００８０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
You can also open both power
windows from outside the vehicle
with the remote transmitter (see
page ).
Press this button once
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the passenger’s door.
Some exterior lights will flash twice
each time you push the button.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the door activated
position) will come on when you
press the UNLOCK button. If you do
not open either door within 30
seconds, the lights fade out. If you
relock the doors with the remote
transmitter before 30 seconds have
elapsed, the lights will go off
immediately.
Press this button once to
lock both doors. Some exterior lights
will flash once.
When you push the LOCK button
twice within 5 seconds, the lights will
flash and the horn will beep to verify
that the doors are locked and that
the security system has set. The
LOCK button will not work this way
if either door is not fully closed.
When the key is in the ignition
switch, the functions of each button
is disabled.
Press this
button for about 1 second to open
the trunk.
Press and hold this
button for about 2 seconds to attract
attention: the horn will sound and
the exterior lights will flash for about
30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
press any other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If you do not open either door within
30 seconds, the doors automatically
relock and the security system sets.
92
UNLOCK
LOCK
TRUNK RELEASE
PANIC
Remote Transmitter
78
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
０５／０７／２７ １５：４０：２３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００８１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
To replace the battery:
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Battery type: CR1616 Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Remote Transmitter Care
Replacing the Transmitter
Battery
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
79
SCREW
TAB
BATTERY
０５／０７／２７ １５：４０：３６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００８２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and note
the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same ( side facing down), then
insert it into the back of the cover.
Install the parts in reverse order.
4.
5.
Remote Transmitter
80
０５／０７／２７ １５：４０：４３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００８３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keep the trunk lid closed at all times
while driving to avoid damaging the
lid, and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See
on page .
To protect items in the trunk when
you need to give the key to someone
else:
Lock the trunk release handle
with the master key.
Give the person the valet key.
As a safety feature, your vehicle has
a release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside. To open the trunk, push the
release lever to the left.
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page .
Youcanopenthetrunkintwoways:
Pull the trunk release handle to
the left of the driver’s seat.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter.
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
1.
2.
50
36
Carbon
Monoxide Hazard
Emergency Trunk Opener
Trunk
Instruments and Controls
81
Pull
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
MASTER
KEY
０５／０７／２７ １５：４０：５８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００８４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The 4-cylinder EX model has a
power seat bottom height
adjustment. All other driver’s seat
adjustmentsinthismodelare
manual.
The 4-cylinder LX model has manual
driver’s seat adjustments (see next
column).
All V6 models and the 4-cylinder
EX-L models have a power
adjustable driver’s seat.
The front passenger’s seat in all
models adjusts manually.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
releasethebar.Trytomovetheseat
to make sure it is locked in position.
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up on the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
1311
Seats
Manual Seat Adjustments
82
０５／０７／２７ １５：４１：１０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００８５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The height of your driver’s seat is
power adjustable. Pull up on the
switch to raise the seat. Push it down
to lower the seat.
Make sure to pull the lever upward
or downward to its full range.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. To raise the seat,
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
On 4-cylinder EX modelOn 4-cylinder LX model
Driver’s Seat Power Height
Adjustment
Driver’s Seat Manual Height
Adjustment
Seats
Instruments and Controls
83
０５／０７／２７ １５：４１：２１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００８６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
11 13
On all V6 models, and the 4-cylinder
EX-L model
Raises or lowers the
seat.
Adjusts the seat-
back angle forward
or backward.
Moves the front of
the seat up or down
and the rear of the
seat up or down.
Moves the seat
forward and
backward.
The controls for the power
adjustable driver’s seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the seat with the ignition
switch in any position. Make all seat
adjustments before you start driving.
Moving the long horizontal switch
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat-back angle.
Power Seat Adjustments
Seats
84
０５／０７／２７ １５：４１：３４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００８７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To use the console lid as an armrest,
slide it to the desired position.
Make sure your passenger’s hands
orfingersareawayfromthearmrest
before moving it.
To get into the rear seat on the
driver’s side, open the door and pull
the release lever up on the side of
the seat-back. The seat-back will tilt
forward to allow easier entry to the
rear seat.
To change the lumbar support, move
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back forward or backward.
Keep moving the lever forward or
backward until you find a suitable
position.
CONTINUED
On EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models
On all V6 models and the 4-cylinder
EX-L model
Driver’s Lumbar Support Armrest Rear Seat Access
Driver’s Side
Seats
Instruments and Controls
85
RELEASE LEVER
０５／０７／２７ １５：４１：４５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００８８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To get into the rear seat on the
passenger’s side, push downward on
the release lever at the base of the
seat-back. The seat-back will tilt
forward and the entire seat will move
forward to allow easier entry to the
rear seat.
To get into the rear seat on the
driver’s side, open the door and pull
up on the seat-back adjustment lever.
The seat-back will tilt forward to
allow easier entry to the rear seat.
After a passenger gets into the rear
seat, push the seat-back to the
upright position and push the whole
seat backwards until it latches. Make
sure the seat is fully latched before
sitting in it.
On LX and EX models
Passenger’s Side
Seats
86
SEAT-BACK ADJUSTMENT LEVER
RELEASE LEVER
To avoid damaging the seat-back angle
adjustment motor, do not operate the
seat-back angle switch when the seat-
back is tilted forward.
０５／０７／２７ １５：４１：５３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００８９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
13
The head restraints adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it
while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints on the front seats and on
the outer rear seats.
The head restraints help protect you
and your passengers from whiplash
and other injuries.
Theyaremosteffectivewhenyou
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
Head Restraints
Seats
Instruments and Controls
87
RELEASE BUTTON
FRONT REAR
RELEASE BUTTON
０５／０７／２７ １５：４２：０３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００９０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The back of the rear seat folds down,
giving you direct access to the trunk.
The left and right seat-backs of the
rear seat can be folded separately
from inside the vehicle or inside the
trunk.
To fold down the seat-back from
inside the vehicle, insert the master
keyinthelockontherearshelf.To
fold down the driver’s side, turn the
key clockwise, pull down the top of
the seat-back, then release the key.
To fold down the passenger’s side,
turn the key counterclockwise and
perform the same procedure.
When storing cargo, you can move
therearcentershoulderbeltoutof
the way by removing the belt from
the guide.
Folding Rear Seat
Seats
88
GUIDE
CENTER
SHOULDER BELT
MASTER KEY
０５／０７／２７ １５：４２：１２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００９１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To release the seat-back from inside
the trunk, pull the release under the
trunk panel. Push the seat-back
down, then let go of the release.
To lock the seat-back upright, push it
firmly against the trunk panel. Make
sure it is latched in place by pulling
on the top of the seat.
Make sure that the folded seat-back
does not interfere with the front
passenger’s seat-back. This will
cause the front passenger’s weight
sensors to work improperly (see
page ). Also check the passenger
airbag off indicator to assure proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag.
Do not put any heavy items on the
seat-back when it is folded.
Make sure all items in the trunk, or
items extending through the opening
into the back seat, are secured.
Looseitemscanflyforwardand
cause injury if you have to brake
hard. See on page
.
Never drive with the seat-back
folded down and the trunk lid open.
See on
page .
Make sure all rear shoulder belts are
positioned in front of the rear seat-
back, and the center shoulder belt is
re-positioned in the guide whenever
the seat-back is in its upright position.
Be sure the center shoulder belt is
not twisted.
50
25
193
Seats
Carrying Cargo
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Instruments and Controls
89
Pull
０５／０７／２７ １５：４２：２１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００９２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat temperature drops.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Both front seats have seat heaters.
The passenger seat is only heated in
the seat bottom because of the side
airbag cutoff system. The ignition
switch must be in the ON (II)
position to use seat heaters. Push the
top of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat
up the seat. After the seat reaches a
comfortable temperature, select LO
by pushing the bottom of the switch.
This will keep the seat warm.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
Seat Heaters
90
SEAT
HEATER
SWITCH
０５／０７／２７ １５：４２：２９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００９３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower either
window. To open the window, push
the switch down and hold it. Release
the switch when you want the
window to stop. Pull back on the
switchandholdittoclosethe
window.
Thewindowsoperateforupto10
minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either door
cancels this function.
If the MAIN switch is off, the
passenger’s windows cannot be
raised or lowered. Keep the MAIN
switch off when you have children in
the vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
To open or close the
driver’s window, push or pull the
window switch firmly down or up to
the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go
down or up all the way. To stop the
window, pull or push the window
switch briefly.
Power Windows
AUTO
Instruments and Controls
91
MAIN SWITCH
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
０５／０７／２７ １５：４２：３７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００９４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. The
power window system needs to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
Press the UNLOCK button once
to unlock the driver’s door.
Press the UNLOCK button a
second time, and hold it. The
passenger’s door unlocks, and
both windows start to open. To
stop the windows, release the
button.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
You can open both windows from the
outside with the remote transmitter.
If the driver’s
window runs into any obstacle while
it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it. Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds. To open the windows further,
press the button again (within 10
seconds).
You cannot close the windows with
the remote transmitter.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
Power Windows
Opening the Windows with the
Remote Transmitter
AUTO REVERSE
92
０５／０７／２７ １５：４２：４８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００９５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can open and close the windows
with the key in the driver’s door lock.
To close:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key counterclockwise,
then release it.
Turn the key counterclockwise
again, and hold it. Both windows
starttoclose.Tostopthewindows,
release the key.
To close the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain(within
10 seconds).
NOTE: If the windows stop before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
To open:
Insert the key in the driver’s door
lock.
Turn the key clockwise, then
release it.
Turnthekeyclockwiseagain,and
hold it. Both windows start to open.
To stop the windows, release the
key.
To open the windows further, turn
andholdthekeyagain(within
10 seconds).
NOTE: If the windows stop before
the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
4.
1.
2.
Opening/Closing the Windows
with the Key
Power Windows
Instruments and Controls
93
Open
Close
UNLOCK BUTTON
０５／０７／２７ １５：４３：０１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００９６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The moonroof can be tilted up in the
back for ventilation, or it can be slid
back into the roof. Use the switch
under the left dashboard vent to
operate the moonroof. You must
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position for the moonroof to
operate.
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can open and close the
moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
you turn off the ignition switch. The
key-off delay cancels as soon as you
open either door.
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center part of the
switch ( ). To close the
moonroof, press and hold the upper
part of the switch ( ). To open
the moonroof, press and hold the
lower part of the switch ( ).
Release the switch when the
moonroof gets to the desired
position.
If equipped
Moonroof
94
MOONROOF SWITCH
Close
Tilt
MOONROOF SWITCH
Open
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-freezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
０５／０７／２７ １５：４３：１３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００９７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push or pull the adjustment knob
right, left, up, or down to move the
mirror.
When you finish, turn the
adjustment knob to the center
(off) position. This turns off the
adjustment knob to keep your
settings.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Turn the adjustment knob to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
3.
4.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
95
ADJUSTMENT KNOB
TAB
０５／０７／２７ １５：４３：２２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００９８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up fully. To release it, pull up
slightly, push the button, and lower
the lever. The parking brake
indicator on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released (see page ).
If you drive without fully releasing
the parking brake, the beeper
sounds continuously.
58
If equipped
Parking Brake
Mirrors, Parking Brake
96
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axle.
０５／０７／２７ １５：４３：３０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ００９９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
97
COIN POCKET
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
VANITY MIRROR
SUNGLASSES
HOLDER
BEVERAGE HOLDER SUN VISOR
ACCESSORY
POWER SOCKET
BEVERAGE HOLDER
COAT HOOK
GLOVE BOX
CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
CENTER CD POCKET
０５／０７／２７ １５：４３：３６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１００
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the glove box by pulling the
handle to the left. Close it with a firm
push. Lock or unlock the glove box
with the master key.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
The center console has two beverage
holders on the front. Your vehicle
also has beverage holders in the
door pockets and the rear panels.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the door pocket beverage
holders when you open or close the
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
Glove Box Beverage Holders
Interior Convenience Items
98
MASTER KEY
Lock
Unlock
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
０５／０７／２７ １５：４３：４５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１０１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the right lever and lift the
armrest.
To close, lower the armrest, and
push it down until it latches.
You can put small items in the tray
located in the console compartment
lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
left lever and lift up the armrest.
Thetrayintheconsolecompartment
has a coin holder.
To open the center CD pocket, push
down on the center of the lid to
unlatch it. It will swing open
automatically. To close it, push the
lid down until it latches. This pocket
can store up to 12 CDs.
On vehicles without navigation system
Console Compartment Center CD Pocket
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
99
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
RIGHT LEVER
LEFT LEVER
Push
０５／０７／２７ １５：４３：５６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１０２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the coin pocket, push the
top of the lid. To close it, push the lid
down until it latches. The
compartmentcannotbeusedasan
ashtray.
There are two accessory power
sockets in your vehicle. One is
locatedattherightofthecoin
pocket, and the other is under the
armrest in the console compartment
storage area.
To use an accessory power socket,
push the top of the lid.
To use an accessory power socket,
pull up the cover.
Coin Pocket Accessory Power Sockets
Interior Convenience Items
100
０５／０７／２７ １５：４４：０４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１０３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider.
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.
Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
it. The lights beside the mirror come
on when you pull up the cover.
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When more than one
socket is being used, the combined
power rating of the accessories
should be 120 watts or less
(10 amps).
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
Whenusingthesunvisorforthe
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out.
Do not use the sun visor extension
over the inside mirror.
Sun Visor Vanity Mirror
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
101
SUN VISOR
０５／０７／２７ １５：４４：１７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１０４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To open the sunglasses holder, push
ontherearedge.Makesurethe
holder is closed while you are driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in
thisholder.Makesuretheyare
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
To use a coat hook, pull it down.
Close it with a firm push.
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch; ON, Door Activated (center),
and OFF.
Sunglasses Holder Coat Hook Ceiling Light
Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
102
COAT HOOK
DOOR ACTIVATED
OFF
ON
０５／０７／２７ １５：４４：２９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１０５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The front ceiling light has a two-
position switch; Door Activated and
OFF.
In the Door Activated position both
ceiling lights, the light comes on
when you:
Open either door.
Unlock the driver’s door with the
master door lock switch, lock tab,
key, or the remote transmitter.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
After both doors are closed tightly,
the light(s) dims slightly, then fade
out in about 30 seconds.
If you do not open either door after
unlocking the driver’s door or
removing the key from the ignition
switch, the light(s) fades out in
about 30 seconds.
If you leave either door open without
the key is in the ignition switch, the
ceiling light(s) will go off after 3
minutes.
Turn on a spotlight by pushing the
lens. Push the lens again to turn it
off. You can use the spotlights at all
times.
On EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models
Interior Lights
Spotlights
Instruments and Controls
103
DOOR
ACTIVATED
OFF
LX and LX-V6 models
EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models
０５／０７／２７ １５：４４：４１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１０６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The courtesy light in each door
comes on when the door is opened,
and goes out when the door is closed.
Your vehicle also has a courtesy light
in the ignition switch. This light
comesonwhenyou;
Open either door.
Unlock the driver’s door.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
This light fades out about 30 seconds
after you close both doors.
The courtesy light between the
spotlights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the Select/Reset
knob on the instrument panel.
On EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models
Interior Lights
Courtesy Lights
104
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
DOOR LIGHT
COURTESY LIGHT
０５／０７／２７ １５：４４：５２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１０７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The standard audio system has
many features. This section de-
scribes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The heating and cooling system in
your vehicle provides a comfortable
driving environment in all weather
conditions.
......Heating and Cooling System . 106
......................Heating and A/C . 108
..........Climate Control System . 113
Climate Control System
.......with navigation system . 117
.........Dual Temperature Control . 121
.............Climate Control Sensors . 123
...............................Audio System . 124
.................AM/FM/CD Player . 126
............AM/FM/CD Changer . 136
AM/FM/CD Changer
.......with navigation system . 149
...........AM/FM Radio Reception . 164
...XM
Satellite Radio Reception . 166
...................Protecting Your CDs . 169
.........Caring for the Tape Player . 170
...............Remote Audio Controls . 171
................Radio Theft Protection . 172
.........................Setting the Clock . 173
...........................Security System . 174
..............................Cruise Control . 175
HomeLink Universal
...............................Transceiver . 178
The security system helps to
discourage vandalism and theft of
your vehicle.
On all models except the 4-cylinder LX
Features
Features
105
０５／０７／２７ １５：４４：５８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１０８
Main Menu
Read the appropriate pages in this
section for operation of the heating
and cooling systems installed in your
vehicle.
See pages to for the
manual system.
See pages to for the
automatic system.
See pages to for the
automatic system with navigation
system.
You can control the driver and the
passenger side temperature
independently.
The dual temperature control is
referred to page to .121 122
112108
116
120117
113
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
Heating and Cooling System
106
(LX,EX and LX-V6 models)
Automatic System
Manual System
(EX-L and EX-V6 models without navigation system)
U.S. models
Canadian models
０５／０７／２７ １５：４５：１１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１０９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Heating and Cooling System
Features
107
Automatic A/C System with navigation system
(EX-L and EX-V6 models)
U.S. models shown.
０５／０７／２７ １５：４５：１６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１１０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
dial counterclockwise to decrease it.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. The
indicator above the button is on
when the A/C is on.
Fan Control Dial
Temperature Control Dial
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Heating and A/C
108
FAN CONTROL DIAL TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
MODE BUTTONS
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
MAX A/C BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) BUTTON
LX, EX, and LX-V6 models
０５／０７／２７ １５：４５：２５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１１１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
In this case, you cannot turn the A/C
off.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode.
Each time you press a mode button,
the indicator above the button is on.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C,
selects , and switches to
recirculation mode. Each indicator
abovethebuttonisonwhenMAX
A/C is turned on.
Use the mode control buttons to
select the vents air flows from. Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
72
MAX A/C Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Mode Control
Recirculation Button
Heating and A/C
Features
109
０５／０７／２７ １５：４５：４９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１１２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then exhausts it
through vents near the rear window.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Select .
When you select , the system
automatically switches to the fresh
air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator above the
button comes on when a fan speed
is selected.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
Recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
64
Ventilation Using the Heater Using the A/C
Heating and A/C
110
０５／０７／２７ １５：４６：０４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１１３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
Turn the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature to your
preference.
Once the engine is warmed up, this
setting is suitable for all driving
conditions.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select the MAX A/C mode. The
system automatically turns on the
A/C, selects and switches
to recirculation mode.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was previously off.
Adjust the temperature so the
airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.
1.
1.2.
3.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If the interior is very warm,
CONTINUED
Dehumidify the Interior To Def og and Defrost
Heating and A/C
Features
111
０５／０７／２７ １５：４６：１９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１１４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator will not come on if it
was previously off.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below each vent.
This sends more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents. Once the
windshield is clear, select fresh air
mode to avoid fogging the windows.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Turning the fan speed control dial all
the way to the left shuts the system
off.
When you switch to , from
or , the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from
rapidly fogging up when the air is
suddenly routed away from the
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button until the indicator in the
buttoncomesonandthengoesoff.
When you switch to or
from or , the
A/C will stay on or off depending on
howitwassetpreviously.
1.
2.
3.
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
To Turn Everything Off
Heating and A/C
112
０５／０７／２７ １５：４６：３４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１１５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
Press the AUTO button. The
indicator in the button comes on.
Set the desired temperature by
turning the driver’s side
temperature control dial.
YouwillseeAUTOinthesystem’s
display.
You will see FULL AUTO in the
system’s display.
1.
2.
On U.S. models
On Canadian models
Climate Control System
Automatic Operation
Features
113
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
OFF BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
AUTO BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
A/C BUTTON
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTER
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
EX -L and EX-V6 models
without navigation system
(U.S. models)
EX -L and EX-V6 models
(Canadian models)
０５／０７／２７ １５：４６：４７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１１６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in full automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled.
Making any manual selection causes
thewordAUTOinthedisplaytogo
out.
When you turn the passenger’s side
temperature control dial, the
indicator in the DUAL button comes
on and the driver’s side and
passenger’s side temperature can be
controlled independently (see page
).
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit
( ), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
heater starts to develop warm air.
Select the fan speed by pressing the
fan control buttons ( or ).
The fan speed is shown in vertical
bars in the display.
Turn these dials to the desired
temperature. The temperature
setting is shown in the display.
The driver and passenger can select
independent temperature settings.
Making any manual selection causes
thewordFULLinthedisplaytogo
out.
121
On U.S. models
On Canadian models
Semi-automatic Operation Fan Control Buttons
Temperature Control Dials
Climate Control System
114
０５／０７／２７ １５：４７：０１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１１７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press the DUAL button to select
dual temperature control mode (see
page ).
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control buttons below
the outside temperature.
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioningonandoff.Youwillsee
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you press the DUAL button
again (indicator turns off), both
sides adjust to the driver’s side
temperature.
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
This button turns the windshield
defrost on and off.
When you push this button, air flows
from the defroster vents at the base
of the windshield, and the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. When
the indicator in the button is on, the
passenger’s temperature cannot be
set separately from the driver’s.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
121
72
Climate Control System
Dual Button
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Recirculation Button Windshield Defroster Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Features
115
０５／０７／２７ １５：４７：１７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１１８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use the MODE button to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents in all modes.
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode
selected.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
If you press the OFF button, the
climate control system shuts off
completely.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
Mode Control To Turn Everything Off
Climate Control System
116
０５／０７／２７ １５：４７：３２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１１９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’s
interior temperature is
independently regulated for the
driver and passenger. If the driver’s
side of the vehicle is getting too
much sun, the system will adjust to a
lower temperature.
The climate control system for your
vehicle can also be operated by voice
control. See the navigation section in
your quick start guide for an
overview of this system, and the
navigation system manual for
complete details.
Climate Control System
Voice Control System
Automatic Operation
Features
117
AUTO BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
DEFROST BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
ICONS
MODE ICONS
A/C BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING
(A/C) ICONS
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
DUAL BUTTON
EX-L and EX-V6 models with navigation system
０５／０７／２７ １５：４７：４３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１２０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
heater starts to develop warm air.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit
( ), the system runs at full
cooling or heating only. It does not
regulate the interior temperature.
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in full automatic
mode. All other features remain
automatically controlled.
If you press the A/C button next to
the display, the manual selections
will show in the display. Making any
manual selection causes the
indicator in the AUTO button to turn
off.
Press the AUTO button. The
indicator in the button comes on.
Set the desired temperature by
pressing the driver’s side
temperature control buttons. Press
to raise the temperature or
to lower it. The selected
temperature will show in the upper
display.
When you press the passenger’s side
temperature control buttons, the
indicator in the DUAL button comes
on and the driver’s side and
passenger’s side temperature can be
controlled independently (see page
).
1.
2.
121
Climate Control System
Semi-automatic Operation
118
０５／０７／２７ １５：４７：５４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１２１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
Select the fan speed by pressing the
A/C button to view the display, then
press any of the fan control icons.
Press these buttons ( or ) to the
desired temperature. The
temperature setting is shown in the
upper display.
Press the DUAL button to select
dual temperature control mode (see
page ).
When the recirculation indicator is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
The driver and passenger can select
independent temperature settings.
When you press the DUAL button
again (indicator turns off), both
sides adjust to the driver’s side
temperature.
Press the A/C button to view the
display. Touching ON or OFF in the
display turns the air conditioning on
andoff.YouwillseeA/CONorA/C
OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the
temperature control buttons below
the outside temperature.
121
Climate Control System
Fan Control
Temperature Control Buttons
Dual Button Recirculation Button
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button/
Icons
Features
119
０５／０７／２７ １５：４８：０９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１２２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This button turns the windshield
defrost on and off.
When you push the button, air flows
from the defroster vents at the base
of the windshield, and the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. When
the indicator in the button is on, the
passenger’s temperature cannot be
set separately from the driver’s.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
Use the mode control icons to select
thevents the air flows from.Some
air will flow from the dashboard
corner vents in all modes.
Press the A/C button to view the
display, then touch any of the mode
icons on the display.
Air flows fromthe center
andcorner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
thevents in the dashboardand the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
If youpress the OFF button, the
climate control system shuts off
completely.
Keep the system off for short
periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
When the climate control system is
turned off, the temperature in the
upper display also turns off.72
Windshield Defroster Button
Rear Window Defogger Button
Mode Control To Turn Everything Off
Climate Control System
120
０５／０７／２７ １５：４８：２７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１２３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the front passenger.
Your vehicle has four temperature
control buttons, two for the driver,
and two for the passenger.
Thedriver’ssideandthepassenger’s
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials or buttons
when the indicator in the DUAL
button is on.
CONTINUED
With navigation system
On EX-L and EX-V6 models without
navigation system
Dual Temperature Control
Features
121
DUAL BUTTON
DUAL BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL BUTTONS
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
Without navigation system
With navigation system
０５／０７／２７ １５：４８：３６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１２４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
▲▼
To set the driver’s side temperature
differently than the passenger’s,
press the DUAL button, then turn
the driver’s control dial or press the
or buttons on the driver’s side.
To set the passenger’s side
differently than the driver’s, turn the
passenger’s control dial or press the
or buttons on the passenger’s
side. You can adjust the passenger’s
side without pressing the DUAL
button first.
When you set the temperature to its
lower or upper limit, it is displayed as
or .
Push AUTO or to turn on the
system. The selected temperatures
appears in the display (in the upper
display with the navigation system).
When the indicator in the DUAL
button is off, you can adjust both
sides to the same temperature by
adjusting the driver’s side
temperature control dial or buttons.
Temperature Control Dials/Buttons
Dual Temperature Control
122
PASSENGER’S SIDEDRIVER’S SIDE
０５／０７／２７ １５：４８：４５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１２５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
On EX-L and EX-V6 models
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
Features
123
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
０５／０７／２７ １５：４８：５１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１２６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To operate your vehicle’s audio
system refer to the appropriate
pages below.
For FM/AM/CD Player systems,
see pages thru .
For AM/FM/CD Changer
systems without navigation, see
page thru .
For AM/FM/CD Changer
systems with navigation, see page
to thru .
126 135
148136
149 163
Audio System
124
AM/FM/CD Player
(LX models)
０５／０７／２７ １５：４８：５９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１２７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Features
125
AM/FM/CD Changer
Canadian models
U.S. models
AM/FM/CD Changer with navigation system
(EX-L and EX-V6 models)
U.S. models .
(EX-L and EX-V6 models without navigation system)
(EX and LX-V6 models)
０５／０７／２７ １５：４９：０９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１２８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the PWR/VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/
FM button. On the FM band, ST
will be displayed if the station is
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction in AM is not
available.
To Play the AM/FM Radio
AM/FM/CD Player
126
STEREO INDICATOR
SCAN BUTTON
SOUND BUTTON
AM/FM
BUTTON
SEEK BAR
PRESET BARS
PWR/VOL KNOB
TUNE BAR
LX models
AUTO SELECT
BUTTON
０５／０７／２７ １５：４９：１７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１２９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−−−
−
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the
preset bars, and auto select.
Use the tune bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Pressthe side of thebar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
side to tune to a lower
frequency.
The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strongsignal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
bar, then release it.
The scan function samples
all the stations with strong signals on
theselected band. Toactivate it,
press the SCAN button, then release
it. You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 5 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it
for 5 seconds.Whenit playsa station
that you want to listen to, press the
SCAN button again.
Each side of the bars (1
6) can store one frequency on AM
and two frequencies on FM.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
Repeat steps 1 through3 to store a
totalof six stationsonAM and
twelve stations onFM.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each side of
thepreset bar.
Pick a preset number (1 6), you
want for that station. Press the left
or right side of the bar, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN Preset
AM/FM/CD Player
Features
127
０５／０７／２７ １５：４９：２９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１３０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset bar if auto select
cannot find a strong station for every
preset bar.
,pressthe
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM, and twelve FM stations in
the preset bars.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset bars
as previously described.
Press the SOUND button repeatedly
to display the bass (BAS), treble
(TRE), fader (FAD), and balance
(BAL) settings.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the PWR/VOL
knob to adjust the setting to your
liking. When the level reaches the
center, you will see a ‘‘ ’’ in the
display.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the fader, or the
front-to-back strength of the sound.
Adjusts the balance, or side-
to-side strength of the sound.
To turn off auto select
AUTO SELECT Adjusting the Sound
BAS
TRE
FAD
BAL
AM/FM/CD Player
128
０５／０７／２７ １５：４９：４３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１３１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
To play a CD, the ignition switch
must be in the ACCESSORY (I) or
ON(II) position.
Insert a CD into the CD slot. The
drive will pull the CD in the rest of
the way to play it. When the
system reaches the end of the disc,
it will return to the beginning and
play the disc again.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm)
discs without using an adapter
ring.
You operate the CD player with
the same controls used for the
radio. To select the CD player,
press the CD/AUX button. You
will see ‘‘CD’’ in the display. The
number of the track playing is
shown in the display. The system
will continuously play a disc until
you change modes.
AM/FM/CD Player
To Play a CD
Features
129
AM/FM BUTTON TRACK NUMBER
CD SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
PWR/VOL KNOB
LX models
CD/AUX
BUTTON
SCAN/REPEAT BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
０５／０７／２７ １５：４９：５４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１３２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
Each time you
press and release , the player
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track. Press and release to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
The scan function samples
all the tracks on the disc in the order
they are recorded on the CD. To
activate it, press and hold the SCAN
button. You will see SCAN in the
display. You will get a 10 second
sampling of each track on the CD.
Press the SCAN button again to get
out of the system and play the last
track sampled.
To continuously replay
a track, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press it again to turn it off.
Press and release the
RDM button to play the tracks in
random order. You will see RDM in
the display. Press it again to return
to normal play.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM/FM button.
Press the CD/AUX button again to
switch back to the CD player.
To play a tape when a CD is playing,
insert a tape in the player (optional).
If a tape is in the player, press the
CD/AUX button. Press the CD/AUX
button again to switch back to the
CD player. To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold or .
To Change or Select Tracks
SEEK/SKIP
SCAN
REPEAT
RANDOM
AM/FM/CD Player
130
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０５／０７／２７ １５：５０：０５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１３３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−＋
−＋
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
An optional six or eight disc CD
changer is available for your vehicle
from your dealer.
This disc changer uses the same
controls used for the in-dash CD
player or the radio.
Load the desired CDs into the
magazine, and load the magazine
into the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
If there are no CDs in the changer,
the display will flash, and you will
have to select another mode.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 15 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD/AUX button.
Press the AM/FM button to switch
to the AM/FM radio while a CD is
playing. To play the CD, press the
CD/AUX button.
If a tape is in the optional tape player,
press the CD/AUX button to switch
to the tape while a CD is playing.
Press the CD/AUX button again to
switch back to the CD player.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD/AUX button. The disc and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different disc, use the preset 5
(DISC ) side or preset 6 (DISC )
side of the preset bar. To select the
previous disc, press the preset 5
(DISC ), or preset 6 (DISC ) to
select the next disc in sequence.
To Stop Playing a CD Operating the Optional CD
Changer
AM/FM/CD Player
Features
131
０５／０７／２７ １５：５０：１７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１３４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Error Message Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
Press the eject button, and pull out the CD.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.
Press the eject button, and pull out the CD.
Check the CD for damage or deformation.
If the CD cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the CD is
ejected, see your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a CD, find the
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take
the vehicle to your dealer.
CD Player Error Messages
AM/FM/CD Player
132
０５／０７／２７ １５：５０：２６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１３５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Error Message
Solution
Cause
Press the magazine eject button, pull the
magazine out, and check for an error message.
Insertthemagazineagain.Ifthemessagedoes
not disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulled
out, see your dealer.
Press the magazine eject button, pull the
magazine out, and check for an error message.
Insertthemagazineagain.Ifthemessagedoes
not disappear, or the magazine cannot be pulled
out, see your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
If you see an error message in the
display while operating the optional
CD changer, find the cause in the
chart to the right. If you cannot clear
theerrormessage,takethevehicle
to your dealer.
AM/FM/CD Player
Optional CD Changer Error
Messages
Features
133
０５／０７／２７ １５：５０：３６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１３６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Make sure the open side of
thetapeisfacingright,theninsert
thetapemostofthewayintotheslot.
Thesystemwillpullthetapeinthe
rest of the way and begin to play it.
Thetapedirectionindicatorcomes
on to show you which side of the
tape is playing. The indicates the
sideyouinsertedupwardisnow
playing. If you want to play the other
side, press the preset 3 (PLAY/
PROG) side of the preset bar. When
the player reaches the end of the
tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side.
Optional
To Play a Tape
AM/FM/CD Player
134
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
CD/AUX
BUTTON
REPEAT
INDICATOR
AM/FM BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PRESET BARS
PWR/VOL KNOB
LX models
REPEAT
BUTTON
DOLBY
INDICATOR
０５／０７／２７ １５：５０：４４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１３７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
−
−
−
＊
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
To switch to the AM/FM radio or
CD player while a tape is playing,
press the AM/FM or CD/AUX
button. To change back to the tape
player, push the CD/AUX button.
To rewind the tape,
push the preset 1 (REW) side of the
preset bar. You will see REW in the
display. To fast forward the tape,
push the preset 2 (FF) side of the
preset bar. You will see FF displayed.
Press the preset 1, 2, or 3 side of the
bars to take the system out of rewind
or fast forward.
Press the side to find
the beginning of the current song or
passage. Press the side to find
the beginning of the next song or
passage. When the system reaches
the beginning of a song or passage, it
begins to play it.
Press the RPT button
to continuously play a song or
passage. You will see RPT displayed.
The track will repeat until you press
the RPT button again.
The skip and repeat
functions use silent periods on the
tape to find the end of a song or
passage. These features may not
work if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level, or a silent period in the middle
of a selection.
Dolby noise reduction comes on
when you insert a tape. The
indicator in the display also
comeson.Ifthetapewasnot
recorded in Dolby, turn it off by
pressing the preset 4 (NR) side of
the preset bar. Dolby remains off
until you press the preset bar again.
To remove the tape, press the eject
button on the tape player. If you
want to turn the player off, press the
PWR/VOL knob or turn off the
ignition. The tape will remain in the
drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will be in pause
mode. Press the preset 3 (PLAY/
PROG) side of the preset bar.
To Stop Playing a Tape
FF/REW
Tape Search Functions
SKIP
REPEAT
AM/FM/CD Player
Features
135
NOTE:
０５／０７／２７ １５：５０：５６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１３８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the PWR/VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if the station is broadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction in
AM is not available.
For information on XM satellite radio,
see page .139
On U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models
To Play the AM/FM Radio
AM/FM/CD Changer
136
TUNE BAR
SOUND BUTTON
AM/FM BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
SEEK BAR
SCAN BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
PRESET
BARS
A.SEL
BUTTON
NOTE: This illustration shows the U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models.
Other models are similar.
EX, EX-L, and all V6 models without navigation system
０５／０７／２８ １３：３７：５６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１３９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−−−
−
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the
preset bars, and auto select.
Use the tune bar to tune
the radio to a desired frequency.
Pressthe side of thebar to tune
to a higher frequency, and press the
side to tune to a lower
frequency.
The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strongsignal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
bar, then release it.
The scan function samples
all the stations with strong signals on
theselected band. Toactivate it,
press the SCAN button, then release
it. You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 5 seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play it
for 5 seconds.Whenit playsa station
that you want to listen to, press the
SCAN button again.
Each side of the bars (1
6) can store one frequency on AM
and two frequencies on FM.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each side of
thepreset bar.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset number (1 6), you
want for that station. Press the left
or right side of the bar, and hold it
until you hear a beep.
1.
2.
3.
To Select a Station
TUNE
SEEK
SCAN Preset
AM/FM/CD Changer
Features
137
０５／０７／２８ １３：３８：０６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１４０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset bar if auto select
cannot find a strong station for every
preset bar.
,pressthe
A. SEL button. This restores the
presets you originally set.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM, and twelve FM stations in
the preset bars.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset bars
as previously described.
Press the SOUND button repeatedly
to display the bass (BAS), treble
(TRE), fader (FAD), and balance
(BAL) settings.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the PWR/VOL
knob to adjust the setting to your
liking. When the level reaches the
center, you will see a ‘‘ ’’ in the
display.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusts the balance, or side-
to-side strength of the sound.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the fader, or the
front-to-back strength of the sound.
4.
To turn off auto select
AUTO SELECT
Adjusting the Sound
BAS
BAL
TRE
FAD
AM/FM/CD Changer
138
０５／０７／２８ １３：３８：２１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１４１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States except Hawaii and
Alaska. It is not available in Canada.
XM
is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Satellite radio is available on U.S.
models only.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the CD/AUX/
XM button.
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust
the volume.
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models
Satellite Digital Radio
To Play XM
Satellite Radio
AM/FM/CD Changer
Features
139
PRESET BARS
CATEGORY INDICATOR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
SCAN BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
TUNE BAR
DISPLAY
BUTTON
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models
CD/AUX/XM
BUTTON
０５／０７／２８ １３：３８：３１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１４２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
The scan function samples
all channels for 5 seconds. To
activate the function, push the SCAN
button. Push it again to get out of the
sequence.
Each side of the preset
bar can store one channel in XM1
and one in XM2.
Repeat steps 1 through3 to store a
total of six stations on XM1 and
six on XM2.
The
seek/skip function selects the
various categories in XM, such as
Jazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.
Push the to change the
category forward. Push the to
change the category backward. To
search for channels within a
category, press the TUNE bar .Press the TUNE bar to change
channel selections. Press for
higher numbered channels and
for lower numbered channels.
When in the satellite radio mode,
you can use any of four methods to
find channels: tune, seek/skip
(category), scan, and the
preset bars.
Push the CD/AUX/XM button.
(You will see XM1 or XM2.)
Press and release this
button to change the display. The
display changes in this sequence:
channel name, channel number,
category, artist name,and music title.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset icon or number, and
hold it until you hear a beep.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To Select a Channel SCAN
Preset
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)
TUNE
DISP
AM/FM/CD Changer
140
０５／０７／２８ １３：３８：４６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１４３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
CONTINUED
To load or play CDs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON(II) position.
On models with Satellite Radio
You operate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD/AUX button (CD/AUX/XM
button on models with satellite
radio). The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. With
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and
track numbers are displayed. The
system will continuously play a CD
until you change modes.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
:
To Play a CD
AM/FM/CD Changer
Features
141
CD/AUX
BUTTON
EJECT
BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP
BAR
LOAD BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
CD LOAD
INDICATOR
CD SLOT
TRACK NUMBER
AM/FM BUTTON
DISC NUMBER
REPEAT BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
PRESET
BARS
NOTE: This illustration shows the U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models.
Other models are similar.
CD/AUX/
XM
BUTTON
EX, EX-L and all V6 models without navigation system
０５／０７／２８ １３：３８：５７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１４４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s in-dash CD changer
holds up to six discs. You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
When the CD load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAd’’ appears in the
screen again, insert the next CD in
the slot.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAd’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last CD loaded.
Press the LOAD button until you
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the
display.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
The disc number for an empty
position is highlighted and the red
CD load indicator starts blinking.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM/FM button.
Press the CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM
button again to switch back to the
CD changer.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
To listen to satellite radio when a CD
is playing, press the CD/AUX/XM
button.
To play a tape when a CD is playing,
insert a tape in the player (optional).
If a tape is in the player, press the
CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM button.
Press the CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM
button again to switch back to the
CD changer.
Insert a disc into the CD slot when
the green CD load indicator comes
on. Insert it only about halfway;
the drive will pull it in the rest of
the way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in
the display as the CD load
indicator turns red and blinks as
the CD is loaded.
1.
2.
1.
3.
4.
5.
On models with Satellite Radio
Loading CDs in the In-dash CD
Changer
AM/FM/CD Changer
142
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０５／０７／２８ １３：３９：１０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１４５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−−
＋
−
−
The scan function samples
all the tracks on the selecteddisc in
the order they are recorded on the
CD. To activate it, press and release
theSCANbutton. You will see SCAN
in the display. You will get a 10
second sampling of each track on the
selected CD.Press the SCAN button
again to get out of the system.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate side of a
preset bar. The system stops playing
the current CD and starts the
loading sequence. It plays the CD
just loaded.
Youoperate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
The numbers of the disc and track
playingareshowninthedisplay.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate side of a preset bar
(1 6) or use the preset 5 (DISC )
to select the previous discor preset 6
(DISC ) toselect thenext discin
sequence.If you select a loaded
position in the CD changer, the
system will try to load the CD in the
next available slot.
Each time you
press and release , the system
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track. Press and release to
skip backward to the beginning of
thecurrent track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of theprevious
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold or .
This function samples
thefirst trackof eachdiscinthe
order they are loaded in the CD
changer. To activate it, select D-
SCAN by pressing and holding the
SCAN button. You will see D-SCAN
in the display. You will get a 10
second sampling of the first track on
eachCD. Press the SCAN button
again to turn off D-SCAN.
SCANTo Change or Select Tracks
SEEK/SKIP
D-SCAN
AM/FM/CD Changer
Features
143
０５／０７／２８ １３：３９：２０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１４６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
To continuously replay
a track, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press it again to turn it off.
To continuously
replay the current disc, press and
hold the RPT button. You will see
D-RPT in the display. Press the RPT
button again to turn it off.
Press and release the
RDM button to play the tracks in
random order. You will see RDM in
the display. Press it again to return
to normal play.
If a tape is in the optional tape player,
press the CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM
button to switch to the tape while a
CD is playing. Press the CD/AUX or
CD/AUX/XM button again to switch
back to the CD changer.
PresstheAM/FMorCD/AUX/XM
button to switch to the AM/FM
radio or satellite radio while a CD is
playing. To play the CD, press the
CD/AUX/XM button again.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the AM/FM button to switch
to the AM/FM radio while a CD is
playing. To play the CD, press the
CD/AUX button.
On models with Satellite Radio
REPEAT
D-REPEAT
RANDOM
To Stop Playing a CD
AM/FM/CD Changer
144
０５／０７／２８ １３：３９：２８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１４７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
−
＋
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
Load the desired CDs into the
magazine, and load the magazine
into the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject ( ) button. When
a disc is removed from a slot, the
system automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
CD in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 15 seconds, the system
returns to the previous mode (AM/
FM or satellite radio). The disc will
reload into the system and will
remainthereinapausemode.
To remove a different CD from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset bar. When that
CD begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
An optional eight disc CD changer is
available for your vehicle from your
dealer.
This disc changer uses the same
controls used for the in-dash CD
changer or the radio.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD/AUX or CD/AUX/XM button.
The disc and track numbers will be
displayed. To select a different disc,
use the preset 5 (DISC ) side or
preset 6 (DISC ) side of the preset
bar. To select the previous disc,
press the preset 5 (DISC ), or
preset 6 (DISC ) to select the next
disc in sequence.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
Operating the Optional CD
Changer
Removing CDs from the In-dash
CD Changer
AM/FM/CD Changer
Features
145
０５／０７／２８ １３：３９：３９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１４８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
SolutionError Message Cause
Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
again. If the message does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
again. If the message does not disappear, or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
:
: U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models
EX, LX-V6, Canadian EX-L, and Canadian EX-V6 models
If you see an error message in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error message, take the vehicle to a
Honda dealer.
AM/FM/CD Changer
CD Changer Error Messages
146
０５／０７／２８ １３：３９：４８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１４９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
＊
＊
CONTINUED
Thetapedirectionindicatorcomes
on to show you which side of the
tape is playing. The indicates the
sideyouinsertedupwardisnow
playing. If you want to play the other
side, press the preset 3 (PLAY/
PROG) side of the preset bar. When
the player reaches the end of the
tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Make sure the open side of
thetapeisfacingright,theninsert
thetapemostofthewayintotheslot.
Thesystemwillpullthetapeinthe
rest of the way and begin to play it.
On models with Satellite Radio
Optional
:
To Play a Tape
AM/FM/CD Changer
Features
147
AM/FM BUTTON
CD/AUX
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
PWR/VOL KNOB
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
DOLBY INDICATOR
REPEAT INDICATOR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
CD/AUX
(XM)
BUTTON
NOTE: This illustration shows the U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models.
Other models are similar.
RPT
BUTTON
EX, EX-L, and all V6 models without navigation system
０５／０７／２８ １３：３９：５９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１５０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
＊
＊
Press the side to find
the beginning of the current song or
passage. Press the side to find
the beginning of the next song or
passage. When the system reaches
the beginning of a song or passage, it
begins to play it.
Press the RPT button
to continuously play a song or
passage. You will see RPT displayed.
The track will repeat until you press
the RPT button again.
The skip and repeat
functions use silent periods on the
tape to find the end of a song or
passage. These features may not
work if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level, or a silent period in the middle
of a selection.
To rewind the tape,
push the preset 1 (REW) side of the
preset bar. You will see REW in the
display. To fast forward the tape,
push the preset 2 (FF) side of the
preset bar. You will see FF displayed.
Press the preset 1, 2, or 3 side of the
bars to take the system out of rewind
or fast forward.
To remove the tape, press the eject
button on the tape player. If you
want to turn the player off, press the
PWR/VOL knob or turn off the
ignition. The tape will remain in the
drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will be in pause
mode. Press the preset 3 (PLAY/
PROG) side of the preset bar.
Dolby noise reduction comes on
when you insert a tape. The
indicator in the display also
comeson.Ifthetapewasnot
recorded in Dolby, turn it off by
pressing the preset 4 (NR) side of
the preset bar. Dolby remains off
until you press the preset bar again.
To switch to the AM/FM radio,
Satellite Radio (U.S. models), or CD
changer while a tape is playing, press
the AM/FM or CD/AUX button
(CD/AUX/XM button on models
with satellite radio). To change back
to the tape player, push the CD/AUX
or CD/AUX/XM button.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
SKIP
REPEAT
Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
To Stop Playing a Tape
AM/FM/CD Changer
148
NOTE:
０５／０７／２８ １３：４０：０８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１５１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The audio system for your vehicle
can also be operated by voice control.
See the navigation section in your
quick start guide for an overview of
this system, and the navigation
system manual for complete details.
AM/FM/CD Changer
Voice Control System
Features
149
AM/FM BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK BAR
TUNE/SOUND KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
PRESET ICONS
AUDIO DISPLAY
BUTTON
SOUND ICONSCAN
ICON
AUTO SELECT ICON
UPPER DISPLAY
EX-L and EX-V6 models with
navigation system
０５／０７／２８ １３：４０：１７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１５２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
The seek function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the or side of the
bar, then release it.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, touch
the SCAN icon. You will see SCAN in
the display. The system will scan for
a station with a strong signal. When
it finds one, it will stop and play that
station for about 5 seconds.
If you do nothing, the system will
scan for the next strong station and
play it for 5 seconds. When it plays a
station you want to listen to, touch
the SCAN icon again.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
Turn the system on by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob or the AM/FM
button. Adjust the volume by turning
the PWR/VOL knob.
Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAY
button will also turn on the system.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the
preset icons, and auto select.
Use the TUNE/SOUND
knob to tune the radio to a desired
frequency. Turn the knob right to
tune to a higher frequency, and turn
the knob left to tune to a lower
frequency.The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button. On the FM band, ST will be
displayed if thestationisbroadcast-
ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction in
AM is not available.
For information on XM satellite radio,
see page .
153
SEEK
SCAN
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station
TUNE
AM/FM/CD Changer
150
０５／０７／２８ １３：４０：２８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１５３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
− Repeat steps 1 through3 to store a
totalof six stationsonAM and
twelve stations onFM.
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
If you are
travelingfar from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
youcan use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Each preset icon can store
one frequency on AM, and two
frequencies on FM.
Touch theAUTO SELECT icon.
‘‘A. SEL’’ flashes in the upper display,
and the system goes into scan mode
for several seconds. It stores the
frequencies of six AM, and twelve
FM stations in the preset icons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset icon if auto select
cannot find a strong station for every
preset icon.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset icons
as previously described.
To turn off auto select, touch the
AUTO SELECT icon. This restores
thepresets you originally set.
Push the AUDIODISPLAY button
to see the preset icons. Then select
the desired band, AM or FM. FM1
and FM2 let you store two
frequencies with each preset icon.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick the preset icon you want for
that station. Touch the icon, and
hold it until you hear a beep.
1.
2.
3.
4.
AUTO SELECT
Preset
AM/FM/CD Changer
Features
151
０５／０７／２８ １３：４０：４０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１５４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
Touch the arrows next to the BAS or
TRE icons. The adjustment shows
you the current setting. Touch the
left or right bars on the sound grid.
Balance is equalized when the
vertical lines are centered on the
grid. Touch the front or rear bars on
the sound grid. The fader is
equalized when the horizontal lines
arecenteredonthegrid.
Touch the SOUND icon or press the
TUNE/SOUND knob.
If you want to adjust the sound while
the radio/CD is playing, push the
AUDIO DISPLAY button, then touch
the SOUND icon in the display.
The system will return to the audio
display about 5 seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode. Touch the
Return icon to go back to the audio
screen.
Adjusts the balance, or side-
to-side strength of the sound.
Adjusts the fader, or the
front-to-back strength of the sound.
Adjusts the treble.
Adjusts the bass.
Adjusting the Sound
BAL
FAD
TRE
BAS
AM/FM/CD Changer
152
FADER ADJUST ICONS
SOUND GRID
RETURN ICON
BALANCE
ADJUST ICONS
BASS ADJUST ICONS
TREBLE ADJUST ICONS
０５／０７／２８ １３：４０：５０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１５５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
Your vehicle is capable of receiving
XM
Satellite Radio anywhere in the
United States except Hawaii and
Alaska. It is not available in Canada.
Satellite radio is available on U.S.
models only.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position.
Turnthesystemon by pushing the
PWR/VOL knob, the CD/AUX/XM,
button or the AUDIO DISPLAY
Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjust
thevolume.
U.S. models
Satellite Digital Radio
To Play XM
Satellite Radio
AM/FM/CD Changer
Features
153
SCAN ICON
MODE ICON
CHANNEL INDICATOR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
AUDIO DISPLAY
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
TUNE KNOB
CH/DISC BAR
PRESET ICONS
U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 models with navigation system
CD/AUX/XM
BUTTON
０５／０７／２８ １３：４１：００ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１５６
button.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
−
Each preset icon can store
one channel in XM1 and one in XM2.
Pick a preset icon, and hold it until
you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through3 to store a
total of six stations on XM1 and
six on XM2.
The
seek/skip function selects the
various categories in XM, such as
Jazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.
Push to change the category
forward. Push to change the
category backward. To search for
channels within a category, turn the
TUNE knob clockwise.
Once your XM channels are preset,
pressing either side of the CH/DISC
bar will select your preset channels.
When in the satellite radio mode,
you can use any of four methods to
find channels: tune, seek/skip
(category), scan, and the
preset icons.
Turn the TUNE knob to change
channels. Turn the knob right for
higher numbered channels and left
for lower numbered channels.
Push the CD/AUX/XM button.
(You will see XM1 or XM2.)
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
touch the MODE icon.
The scan function samples
all channels for 5 seconds. To
activate the function, push the SCAN
butt
on.
Push it again to get out of
scan.
U
set
hetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PresetSEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)To Select a Channel
TUNE
MODE
SCAN
AM/FM/CD Changer
154
０５／０７／２８ １３：４１：１３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１５７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
To load or play CDs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON(II) position.
You operate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD/AUX/XM button (CD/AUX
buttononCanadianmodels).The
number of the track playing is shown
in the display. With the in-dash CD
changer, the disc and track numbers
are displayed. The system will
continuously play a CD until you
change modes.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
:
CONTINUED
On Canadian models
AM/FM/CD Changer
To Play a CD
Features
155
CH/DISC BAR
CD SLOT
EJECT BUTTON
DISC
SCAN
ICON
TRACK
SCAN ICON
SEEK/
SKIP BAR
DISC AND TRACK NUMBERS
UPPER DISPLAY
RANDOM ICON
AUDIO DISPLAY
BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
TRACK REPEAT
ICON
DISC REPEAT
ICON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
DISC ICONS
U.S. model is shown.
LOAD BUTTON
CD/AUX/XM BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
EX-L and EX-V6 models with navigation system
０５／０７／２８ １３：４１：２５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１５８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Your vehicle’s in-dash CD changer
holdsuptosixdiscs.
Press the LOAD button until you
hear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in the
upper display.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
The disc icon for an empty
position is highlighted and the red
CD load indicator starts blinking.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM/FM button.
Press the CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUX
button again to switch back to the
CD changer.
To play the tape when a CD is
playing, insert a tape in the player
(optional). If a tape is in the player,
press the CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUX
button. Press the CD/AUX/XM or
CD/AUX button again to switch
back to the CD changer.
To listen to satellite radio when a CD
is playing, press the CD/AUX/XM
button.
1.
2.
On U.S. models
AM/FM/CD Changer
Loading CDs in the In-dash CD
Changer
156
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０５／０７／２８ １３：４１：３４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１５９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
▼
−
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. If you are not loading
all six positions, the system begins
playing the last CD loaded.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAd’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
When the CD load indicator turns
green and ‘‘LOAd’’ appears in the
screen again, insert the next CD in
theslot.
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
touching a disc icon. The system
stops playing the current CD and
starts the loading sequence. It plays
the CD just loaded.
Youoperate the CD changer with
the same controls used for the radio.
The numbers of the disc and track
playingareshowninthedisplay.
These numbers also appear in the
upper display.
To select a different disc, touch the
appropriate disc icon or press the
or side of the CH/DISC bar. If
you select a loaded position in the
CDchanger, the system will try to
load the CD in the next available slot.
Insert a disc into the CD slot when
the green CD load indicator comes
on. Insert it only about halfway;
the drive will pull it in the rest of
the way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in
the upper display as the CD load
indicator turns red and blinks as
the CD is loaded.
To use the controls, press the
AUDIODISPLAY button.
When you touch
this icon on the audio display or
press the SCAN button, you will get
a10secondsamplingofeachtrack
on the current CD. You will see
TRACK SCAN highlighted on the
audioscreenandSCANintheupper
display. Press the icon or button
again to get out of track scan.4.
5.
3.
CONTINUED
To Change or Select Tracks
TRACK SCAN
AM/FM/CD Changer
Features
157
０５／０７／２８ １３：４１：４６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１６０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−▲▼
When you touch the
RANDOM icon on the audio display,
the system plays the tracks on the
current CD in random order. You
will see RANDOM highlighted on
the audio screen and RDM in the
upper display. To turn this feature
off, touch RANDOM again or select
a different disc icon.
When you touch
the TRACK RPT icon, the system
continuously plays the same track.
You will see TRACK RPT
highlighted on the audio screen and
RPT in the upper display. Press the
icon again to get out of track repeat.
When you touch the
DISC RPT icon on the audio display,
the system continuously replays the
current CD. You will see DISC RPT
highlighted on the audio screen and
D-RPT in the upper display. Touch
the icon to turn the feature off.
When you touch the
DISC SCAN icon on the audio
display, the system gives you a 10
second sampling of the first track on
each disc in the in-dash CD changer.
You will see DISC SCAN highlighted
on the audio screen and D-SCAN in
the upper display. Touch the icon
again to get out of disc scan.
Each time you
press and release , the system
skips forward to the beginning of the
next track. Press and release to
skip backward to the beginning of
the current track. Press it again to
skip to the beginning of the previous
track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold or .
Press the or to
select an icon and play the disc.
PresstheAM/FMorCD/AUX/XM
button to switch to the AM/FM
radio or satellite radio while a CD is
playing. To play the CD, press the
CD/AUX/XM button again.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
Press the AM/FM button to switch
to the AM/FM radio while a CD is
playing. To play the CD, press the
CD/AUX button.
If a tape is in the optional tape player,
press the CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUX
button to switch to the tape while a
CD is playing. Press the CD/AUX/
XM or CD/AUX button again to
switch back to the CD changer.
On Canadian models
On U.S. models
To Stop Playing a CDRANDOM
TRACK RPT
DISC RPT
DISC SCAN
SEEK/SKIP
CH/DISC
AM/FM/CD Changer
158
０５／０７／２８ １３：４１：５７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１６１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
Load the desired CDs into the
magazine, and load the magazine
intothe changer according to the
instructions that came withtheunit.
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject ( ) button. When
you remove a disc is removed from a
slot, the system automatically begins
the load sequence so you can load
another CD in that position. If you do
not remove the disc from the
changer within 15 seconds, the
system returns to the previous mode
(AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc
will reload into the system and will
remainthereinapausemode.
An optional eight disc CD changer is
available for your vehicle from your
dealer.
This disc changer uses the same
controls used for the in-dash CD
changer or the radio.
Toremovea differentCDfromthe
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate icon or the CH/DISC bar.
When that CD begins playing, press
the eject button. Continue pressing
theeject button to remove all the
discs from the changer.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD/AUX/XM or CD/AUX button.
The disc and track numbers will be
displayed. To select a different disc,
use the CH/DISC bar. To select the
previous disc, press the side, or
side to select the next disc in
sequence.
If you select an empty slot in the
magazine, the changer will search
for the next available CD to load and
play.
Operating the Optional CD
Changer
Removing CDs from the In-dash
CD Changer
AM/FM/CD Changer
Features
159
０５／０７／２８ １３：４２：０７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１６２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Error Message Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error
Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
again. If the message does not disappear or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
Press the CD eject button, and pull out the CDs.
Check for an error message, and insert the CDs
again. If the message does not disappear, or the
CDs cannot be pulled out, see your dealer.
If you see an error message in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error message, take the vehicle to a
Honda dealer.
CD Changer Error Messages
AM/FM/CD Changer
160
０５／０７／２８ １３：４２：１４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１６３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
＊
＊
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Make sure the open side of
thetapeisfacingright,theninsert
thetapemostofthewayintotheslot.
Thesystemwillpullthetapeinthe
rest of the way and begin to play it.
Thetapedirectionindicatorcomes
on to show you which side of the
tape is playing. The indicates the
sideyouinsertedupwardisnow
playing. If you want to play the other
side, touch the PLAY/PROG icon.
When the player reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side.
:
On Canadian models
Optional
AM/FM/CD Changer
To Play a Tape
Features
161
TUNE/SOUND KNOB
FAST FORWARD ICON
PLAY/PROG ICON
REWIND ICON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR
CH/DISC BAR
REPEAT INDICATOR
UPPER DISPLAY
AUDIO DISPLAY
BUTTON
NOISE REDUCTION
(NR) ICON
TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR
REPEAT ICON
CD/AUX/XM
BUTTON
CD/AUX BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
EX-L and EX-V6 models with navigation system
０５／０７／２８ １３：４２：２４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１６４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
−
▲
▼
＊
First push the AUDIO DISPLAY
button before selecting any of the
audio icons on the audio screen.
To remove the tape, press the eject
button on the tape player. If you
want to turn the player off, press the
PWR/VOL knob or turn off the
ignition. The tape will remain in the
drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will be in pause
mode. Touch the PLAY/PROG icon.
To fast forward the
tape, push the upper side ( ) of the
CH/DISC bar. You will see FF in the
upper display. To rewind the tape,
push the lower side ( ) of the CH/
DISC bar. You will see REW
displayed. Press either side of the
CH/DISC bar or touch the FF, REW
or PLAY/PROG icon to take the
system out of rewind or fast forward.
Dolby noise reduction comes on
when you insert a tape. The NR
indicator in the display also comes
on. If the tape was not recorded in
Dolby, turn it off by touching the NR
icon. Dolby remains off until you
touch the NR icon again. To switch to the AM/FM radio,
Satellite Radio (U.S. models), or CD
changer while a tape is playing, press
the AM/FM or CD/AUX/XM button
(CD/AUXbuttononCanadian
models). To change back to the tape
player, push the CD/AUX/XM or
CD/AUX button.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
AM/FM/CD Changer
To Stop Playing a Tape Tape Search Functions
FF/REW
162
０５／０７／２８ １３：４２：３２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１６５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Press the side to find
the beginning of the current song or
passage. Press the side to find
the beginning of the next song or
passage. When the system reaches
the beginning of a song or passage, it
begins to play it.
Touch the RPT icon to
continuously play a song or passage.
You will see RPT displayed in the
upper display. The track will repeat
until you touch the RPT icon again.
The skip and repeat
functions use silent periods on the
tape to find the end of a song or
passage. These features may not
work if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level, or a silent period in the middle
of a selection.
AM/FM/CD Changer
SKIP
REPEAT
Features
163
NOTE:
０５／０７／２８ １３：４２：３７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１６６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Radio ReceptionAM/FM Radio Frequencies
AM/FM Radio Reception
164
０５／０７／２８ １３：４２：４９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１６７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Radio Reception
Features
165
０５／０７／２８ １３：４２：５８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１６８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Satellite radio receives signals from
two satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, satellite
radio also allows you to view channel
and category selections in the audio
display.
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.
Available on some U.S. models
Satellite Radio Signals
XM Satellite Radio Reception
166
Signal may be
blocked by
mountains or
large obstacles
to the south.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
Signal is weaker in
these areas.
０５／０７／２８ １３：４３：０６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１６９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the south side of an
east/west mountain road.
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
There may also be other geographic
situations that could affect satellite
radio reception.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM Satellite Radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or ON (II) position, push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system, and press the CD/AUX/XM
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
CONTINUED
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
XM Satellite Radio Reception
Features
167
０５／０７／２８ １３：４３：１７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１７０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number.
To get your radio I.D. number:
Turn the TUNE knob or press the
TUNE bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the
display. Your I.D. will appear in the
display.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
Satellite Radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, ‘‘category’’
or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,
andyou’llbeabletolistentoXM
Radio broadcasts. XM Radio will
continue to send an activation signal
to your vehicle for at least 12 hours
from the activation request. If the
service has not been activated after
36 hours, contact XM Radio.
www.xmradio.com
XM Satellite Radio Reception
168
０５／０７／２８ １３：４３：２４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１７１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When using CD-R discs, use only
high quality CDs labeled for audio
use.
CD-RW discs will not work in this
unit.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
Handle your CDs properly to
prevent damage and skipping.
AnewCDmayberoughonthe
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the CD, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly or possibly jam in the drive.
When recording a CD-R, the
recording must be closed for it to
be used by the system.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
theCDplayer/CDchangerorthe
magazine.
General Information Protecting CDs
Protecting Your CDs
Features
169
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
０５／０７／２８ １３：４３：３７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１７２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store tapes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
placetapeswheretheywillbe
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a tape is exposed
to extreme heat or cold, let it reach a
moderate temperature before
inserting it into the player.
If the tape is loose, tighten it by
turning the hub with a pencil or your
finger. If the label is peeling off,
remove it or it could cause the tape
to jam in the player. Never try to
insert a warped or damaged tape in
the player.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the tape player.
If you see the error message
‘‘ ’’ on the display (on the
upper display on models with
navigation system), press the tape
eject button to remove the tape from
the unit. Make sure the tape is not
damaged. If the tape will not eject or
the error message stays on after the
tape ejects, take the vehicle to your
dealer.
Thetapeplayerpicksupdirtand
oxides from the tape. This
contamination builds up over time
and causes the sound quality to
degrade. To prevent this, you should
clean the player after every 30 hours
of use.
If you do not clean the tape player
regularly, it may eventually become
impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit. Your dealer has a
cleaning kit available.
Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.
Tapes longer than that may break or
jam the drive.
Optional
Caring for the Tape Player
170
０５／０７／２８ １３：４３：４６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１７３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
＋
−
＋
−
＋
−
The VOL button adjusts the volume
up ( ) or down ( ). Press the top
or bottom of the button, hold it until
the desired volume is reached, then
release it.
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top ( ) of
the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
station.
IfyouareplayingaCD,thesystem
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you press the top
( ) of the CH button. Press the
bottom ( ) to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press
it twice to return to the previous
track. You will see the disc and track
numbers in the display.
Ifyouareplayingatapeinthe
optional tape player, press the top
( ) of the CH button to advance to
the next selection. Press the bottom
( ) to go back to the previous
selection. The system senses a silent
period, then resumes playing.
The MODE button changes the
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,
CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape (if
equipped). On models with satellite
radio system, you can also select
XM1 and XM2.
Three control buttons for the audio
system are mounted in the steering
wheel hub. These buttons let you
control basic audio functions without
removing your hand from the wheel.
On all models except the 4-cylinder LX
Remote Audio Controls
Features
171
VOL BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
CH BUTTON
０５／０７／２８ １３：４３：５５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１７４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific code using the preset
bars or the TUNE knob. Because
there are hundreds of number
combinations possible, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this
card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have ten tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in ten attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.
You will have to store your favorite
stations on each side of the preset
bars (1 6) or icons after the system
begins working. Your original
settings were lost when the power
was disconnected.
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ ’’/
‘‘ ’’ in the frequency display
the next time you turn on the system.
Use the preset bars to enter the code.
Thecodeisontheradiocodecard
included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
radio will start playing.
On on models except the 4-cylinder LX
Radio Theft Protection
172
０５／０７／２８ １３：４４：０５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１７５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The upper display shows the time
when the ignition switch is in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
The navigation system receives
signals from the Global Positioning
System (GPS), and the displayed
time is updated automatically by the
GPS. Refer to the navigation system
owner’s manual to set up the time.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock.
To set the time, press the clock set
(SOUND) button until you hear a
beep. The displayed time begins to
blink.
Press and hold the H (preset 4) side
of the bar until the hour advances to
the desired time. Press and hold the
M (preset 5) side of the bar until the
minutes advance to the desired time.
Press the clock set (SOUND) button
again to enter the set time.
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing the
clock set (SOUND) button until you
hear a beep, then pressing the R
(preset 6) side of the bar sets the
clockbacktotheprevioushour.If
the displayed time is after the half
hour, the clock sets forward to the
beginning of the next hour.
For example:
1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:53 will reset to 2:00
On models without navigation system
On models with navigation system
Setting the Clock
Features
173
CLOCK SET BUTTON
PRESET BARS
CLOCK
EX-L and EX-V6 models without
navigation system is shown.
０５／０７／２８ １３：４４：１８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１７６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Once the security system is set,
opening either door without using
the key or the remote transmitter,
the hood, or the trunk will cause the
system to alarm. It also alarms if the
radio is removed from the dashboard
or the wiring is cut.
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter without triggering the
alarm. The alarm will sound if the
trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
opened with the trunk release handle
or the emergency trunk opener.
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights (low beam), parking
lights, side marker lights, and
taillights flash if someone attempts
to break into your vehicle or remove
the radio. This alarm continues for 2
minutes, then it stops. To reset an
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the
remote transmitter.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and trunk. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
indicator on the instrument panel
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or either door is not
fully closed. Before you leave the
vehicle, make sure the doors, trunk,
and hood are securely closed.
To see if the system is set
after you exit the vehicle, press the
LOCK button on the remote
transmitter within 5 seconds. If the
system is set, the horn will beep
once.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
Security System
174
NOTE:
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
０５／０７／２８ １３：４４：２８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１７７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Press and release the DECEL/
SET button on the steering wheel.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel comes on
to show the system is now
activated.
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshifttoholdthesetspeed.
Push in the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel. The CRUISE
MAIN indicator on the instrument
panel will come on.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel the
cruise control. To resume the set
speed, press the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
on the instrument panel will come
back on.
1.
2.
3.Using Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
175
CANCEL
BUTTON
RES/ACCEL
BUTTON
DECEL/SET
BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
０５／０７／２８ １３：４４：３８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１７８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Push on the accelerator pedal until
you reach the desired cruising
speed, then press the DECEL/
SET button.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Even with cruise control turned on,
you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake or
clutch pedal cause cruise control to
cancel.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake or clutch pedal
lightly with your foot. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator on
the instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the DECEL/
SET button.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the DECEL/SET
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Press and hold the DECEL/SET
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
If you need to decrease your
speed quickly, apply the brakes as
you normally would.
Changing the Set Speed
Cruise Control
176
NOTE:
０５／０７／２８ １３：４４：４８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１７９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tap the brake or clutch pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake or clutch pedal, the
system will remember the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above25mph(40km/h),thenpress
and release the RES/ACCEL button.
The CRUISE CONTROL indicator
comes on, and the vehicle will
accelerate to the same cruising
speed as before.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Push the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns
the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
177
CANCEL BUTTON
CRUISE BUTTON
０５／０７／２８ １３：４５：００ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１８０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, you
should unplug the motor for that
device during training. Repeatedly
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor.
They do not have the safety feature
that causes the motor to stop and
reverse if an obstacle is detected
during closing, increasing the risk of
injury.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected. If your garage door
opener was manufactured before
April 1982, you may not be able to
program HomeLink to operate it.
The HomeLink
universal
transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperateupto
three remotely controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
For quick and accurate training,
make sure the remote control
transmitter for the device (garage
door, automatic gate, security
system, etc.) has a fresh battery.
If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the electrical outlet.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote 2 to 5 inches from
HomeLink.Makesureyouarenot
blocking your view of the red
indicator in HomeLink.
Always refer to the operating
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with HomeLink. If
you do not have this information,
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
Todothis,pressandholdthetwo
outside buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then go to step
1.
2.
1.
On EX-V6 model
General Information
Important Safety Precautions
Training HomeLink
Before you begin
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
178
０５／０７／２８ １３：４５：１４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１８１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
button by pushing it for about 1
second.
If the button works,
programming is complete.
If the button does not work go
to step 6.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), your remote
transmitter may stop
transmitting after a short time.
Go to step 4.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, press and
release the remote transmitter
button every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 2 thru 4.
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
around your home (lighting,
automatic gate, security system,
etc.).
If the indicator flashes rapidly
for 2 seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code transmitter:
Go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
Code System’’ (see page ).
If the indicator stays on or
flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
thru 5.
PushandholdtheHomeLink
button for a few seconds, then
watch the red indicator on
HomeLink.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
180
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
179
０５／０７／２８ １３：４５：２９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１８２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
indicator on the garage door
opener unit. (Some systems may
require you to press the button up
to three times.)
Press the HomeLink button again.
It should operate the garage door.
Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on. The indicator may blink, or
comeonandstayon.Youthen
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
6.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
Training With a Rolling Code
System
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
180
TRAINING BUTTON
０５／０７／２８ １３：４５：４０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１８３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the vehicle.
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red
indicator begins to flash, then
release the buttons.
If you want to retrain a programmed
button for a new device, you do not
have to erase all button memory.
You can replace the existing memory
code using this procedure:
Press and hold the HomeLink
button to be trained until the
HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly.
If a rolling code transmitter was
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
If a standard transmitter was
programmed, the indicator will
stay on for about 25 seconds.
HomeLink
is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to
www.homelink.com.
Once the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, continue to
hold the HomeLink button, and
follow steps 3 thru 6 under
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
).
1.
2.
178
Erasing Codes
Retraining a Button
Customer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
181
０５／０７／２８ １３：４５：５４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１８４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 184
.................Fuel Recommendation . 184
.........Service Station Procedures . 185
....................................Refueling . 185
Opening and Closing
................................the Hood . 186
...................................Oil Check . 188
.............Engine Coolant Check . 189
...............................Fuel Economy . 190
...Accessories and Modifications . 191
.............................Carrying Cargo . 193
Before Driving
Before Driving
183
０５／０７／２８ １３：４６：０１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１８６
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 percent ethanol
by volume and up to 15 percent
MTBE by volume. Do not use
gasoline containing methanol.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
If you drive with the low engine
speed (below than about 1,000 rpm),
you may feel the engine knocking. In
this case, you can use premium
unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 91 or higher to
prevent the engine from knocking.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
On EX-V6 model with manual
transmission
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
184
０５／０７／２８ １３：４６：１４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１８７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Open the fuel fill door by pushing
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
1.
2.
Refueling
Quick Start Guide
Fuel Recommendation, Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
185
FUEL FILL CAP
TETHER
Push
ATTACHMENT
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
０５／０７／２８ １３：４６：２４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１８８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Insert the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
maycomeon(seepage ).You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
5.
6.
1.
3.
4.
277
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
186
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
０５／０７／２８ １３：４６：３４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１８９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
uptherestofthewayandholdit
up.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly
to remove the support rod from
the hole. Put the support rod back
into its holding clip. Lower the
hood to about a foot (30 cm) above
the fender, then let it drop. Make
sure it is securely latched.
To close the hood, lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then press down firmly with
your hands. Make sure it is securely
latched.
Pull the support rod out of its clip
by holding the grip, and insert the
end into the designated hole in the
hood.
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood. The hood latch
handle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pull
this handle until it releases the
hood, then lift the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
3.2.
6-cylinder models4-cylinder models
Service Station Procedures
Before Driving
187
GRIP
CLIP
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
LATCH
０５／０７／２８ １３：４６：４６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１９０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange
handle/loop).
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert it all the way back in its hole.
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
1.
2.
3.
4.
232
Service Station Procedures
Oil Check
Adding Engine Oil
188
DIPSTICK
(Orange Handle)
DIPSTICK
(Orange Loop)
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models 4-cylinder models
０５／０７／２８ １３：４６：５８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１９１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page .236
226
Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
Adding
Engine Coolant
Before Driving
189
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
RESERVE TANK
4-cylinder models
MIN
MAX
MAX
RESERVE TANK
6-cylinder models MIN6-cylinder models
０５／０７／２８ １３：４７：０７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１９２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Everytimeyouslowdownand
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.Usethefresh-air
ventilation when possible.
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
messages displayed in the
information display. See
(see page
).
an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
226
For example,
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
190
０５／０７／２８ １３：４７：１６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１９３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
the proper operation of your
vehicle.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows. In these areas,
accessories may interfere with
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
280
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
191
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
０５／０７／２８ １３：４７：２７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１９４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Some examples are:
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components.
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
192
０５／０７／２８ １３：４７：３６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１９５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Door and seat-back pockets
Trunk, including the rear seats
when folded down
Center pocket
Console compartment
Roof-rack (if installed)
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
CONTINUED
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
193
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
TRUNK
GLOVE BOX
CENTER POCKET
DOOR POCKET
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
０５／０７／２８ １３：４７：４６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１９６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−×
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 850 lbs (395 kg). This figure
includes the total weight of all
occupants, cargo, and accessories,
and the tongue load if you are towing
a trailer.
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
in the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity in
step 4.
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 850
lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.
[The placard is on the driver’s
doorjamb.]
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
850 pounds or 395 kilograms.
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
For example, if the maximum load
is 850 lbs and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 100 lbs.
(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
yourvehicle(seepage ).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
213
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits
194
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
０５／０７／２８ １３：４７：５６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１９７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
view and be thrown around the
vehicle during a crash.
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all passengers, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both
areonalabelonthedriver’s
doorjamb.
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
Ifyoufolddownthebackseat,tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
proper operation of the pedals, the
front seats, or the advanced front
airbags.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop. 50
CONTINUED
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Rack
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Before Driving
195
０５／０７／２８ １３：４８：０６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１９８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The cargo net can be used to help
hold down items stored in the trunk.
To use the cargo net, hook it to the
buttons on the floor and sides of the
trunk. You can use the cargo net in
several configurations by hooking it
to different buttons.
When you are not using the cargo
net,storeitinthesparetirewell.
There are hooks on the floor and
sides of the trunk. They can be used
to install a net for securing items.
If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your dealer
for further information.
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
On EX, EX-L, and EX-V6 models
Carrying Cargo
Cargo NetTrunk Hooks
196
０５／０７／２８ １３：４８：１５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０１９９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
manual and automatic transmissions.
It also includes important
information on parking your vehicle,
the braking system, the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system, and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer.
........................Preparing to Drive . 198
.......................Starting the Engine . 199
...................Manual Transmission . 200
..............Automatic Transmission . 203
...........................................Parking . 207
.............................Braking System . 208
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 209
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
........................................System . 211
...........................Towing a Trailer . 213
Driving
Driving
197
０５／０７／２８ １３：４８：２０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２００
Main Menu
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Check that the hood is fully closed.
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Make sure the doors and the
trunk are securely closed and
locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page ).
Check that the trunk is fully
closed.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
2.
1.
6.
7.
8.
9.
14
3.
4.
5.
10.
11.
55
95
82
73
Preparing to Drive
198
０５／０７／２８ １３：４８：３３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２０１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Apply the parking brake.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Push the clutch pedal down all the
way. The START (III) position
does not function unless the clutch
pedal is pressed.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
1.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
Manual Transmission:
Automatic Transmission:
75
Starting theEngine
Driving
199
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air found at
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page .
０５／０７／２８ １３：４８：４４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２０２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The manual transmission is
synchronized in all forward gears for
smooth operation. It has a lockout so
you cannot shift directly from fifth to
reverse.
On vehicles with 6-speed manual
transmission, the lockout system
prevents you from shifting directly
from fifth to reverse instead of sixth
(see page ).
When shifting up or down, make
sure you push the clutch pedal down
all the way, shift to the next gear,
and let the pedal up gradually. When
you are not shifting, do not rest your
foot on the clutch pedal. This can
cause your clutch to wear out faster.
Come to a full stop before you shift
into Reverse. You can damage the
transmission by trying to shift into
reverse with the vehicle moving.
Push down the clutch pedal, and
pause for a few seconds before
shifting into reverse, or shift into one
of the forward gears for a moment.
This stops the gears so they won’t
‘‘grind.’’
When slowing down, you can get
extra braking from the engine by
shifting to a lower gear. This extra
braking can help you maintain a safe
speed and prevent your brakes from
overheating while going down a
steep hill. Before downshifting,
make sure the engine speed will not
go into the tachometer’s red zone in
the lower gear.
202
On 4-cylinder models with 5-speed
manual transmission
On EX-V6 model with 6-speed manual
transmission
Manual Transmission
200
5-speed M/T 6-speed M/T
０５／０７／２８ １３：４８：５３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２０３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
5th to 6th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (24 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (64 km/h)
47 mph (75 km/h)
52 mph (83 km/h)
Shift up
1st to 2nd
2nd to 3rd
3rd to 4th
4th to 5th
Normal acceleration
15 mph (25 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
40 mph (65 km/h)
50 mph (80 km/h)
Your vehicle is equipped with an
aluminum shift lever. If you leave the
vehicle parked outside for a long
time on a hot day, be careful before
moving the shift lever. Because of
the heat, the shift lever may be
extremely hot. If the outside
temperature is low, the shift lever
feels cold.
Drive in the highest gear that lets
the engine run and accelerate
smoothly. This will give you good
fuel economy and effective
emissions control. The following
shift points are recommended:
On EX-V6 model
With 5-speed manual transmission
With 6-speed manual transmission
Recommended Shift Points
Manual Transmission
Driving
201
Rapid slowing or speeding-up
can cause loss of control on
slippery surfaces. If you crash,
you can be injured.
Use extra care when driving on
slippery surfaces.
０５／０７／２８ １３：４９：０１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２０４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Before downshifting, make sure the
engine will not go into the
tachometer’s red zone.
The manual transmission has
lockout so you cannot accidentally
shift from fifth to reverse instead of
sixth while the vehicle is moving. If
you cannot shift to reverse when the
vehicle is stopped:
With the clutch pedal pressed,
move the shift lever to the first/
second gear side of the neutral
gate, then shift to reverse.
If you are still unable to shift to
reverse, apply the parking brake,
and turn the ignition key to the
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
Press the clutch pedal, and shift to
reverse.
With the clutch pedal still pressed,
start the engine.
If you need to use this procedure to
shift to reverse, your vehicle may be
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
6-speed manual transmission only
Engine Speed Limiter Reverse Lockout
Manual Transmission
202
０５／０７／２８ １３：４９：１３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２０５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
These indicators between the tacho-
meter and speedometer show which
position the shift lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
To shift from any position to Park,
pressfirmlyonthebrakepedal,and
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever. You cannot shift
out of Park when the ignition switch
is in the LOCK (0) or the
ACCESSORY(I) position.
CONTINUED
ShiftingShift Lever Position Indicators
Automatic Transmission
Driving
203
SHIFT LEVER
RELEASE BUTTON
０５／０７／２８ １３：４９：２３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２０６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−−
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
press the release button.
Press the release button.
Move the lever.
3
3
3
3
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
You must also press the release
button to shift into Park. To avoid
transmission damage, come to a
complete stop before shifting into
Park. The shift lever must be in Park
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Press the release
buttononthefrontoftheshiftlever
to move it.
Press the brake
pedal and press the release button
on the front of the shift lever to shift
from Park to reverse. To shift from
reverse to neutral, come to a
completestopandthenshift.Press
the release button before shifting
into reverse from neutral.
206
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
Neutral (N)
Park (P) Reverse (R)
204
０５／０７／２８ １３：４９：３１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２０７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
speed and acceleration. You may
notice the transmission shifting up at
higher engine speeds when the
engine is cold. This helps the engine
warm up faster.
This position is
similar to D, except only the first
three gears are selected. Use D
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain,
or to provide engine braking when
going down a steep hill. D can also
keep the transmission from cycling
between third and fourth gears in
stop-and-go driving.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
To help reduce wheel spin.
To shift to second,
pressthereleasebuttononthefront
of the shift lever. This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
To shift from second to
first, press the release button on the
front of the shift lever. This position
locks the transmission in first gear.
By upshifting and downshifting
through 1, 2, D , and D, you can
operate this transmission much like
a manual transmission without a
clutch pedal.
3
33
Automatic Transmission
Engine Speed LimiterDrive (D)
Drive (D )
Second (2)
First (1)
3
Driving
205
０５／０７／２８ １３：４９：４３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２０８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pressing the release
button does not work.
Set the parking brake.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Push down on the key while you
pressthereleasebuttononthe
shift lever and move the shift lever
out of Park to neutral.
Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then reinstall the
cover. Make sure the notch on the
cover is on the left side. Press the
brake pedal, and restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
Putaclothonthenotchofthe
shift lock release slot cover. Using
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the notch of the cover to
remove it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
206
COVER
RELEASE
BUTTON
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
NOTCH
０５／０７／２８ １３：４９：５４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２０９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly, or
your vehicle may roll if it is parked
on an incline.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, set the parking brake
before you put the transmission in
Park. This keeps the vehicle from
moving and putting pressure on the
parking mechanism in the
transmission.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in first gear.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb. If you have a manual
transmission, put it in reverse gear.
Make sure the parking brake is
fully released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or
damage the rear brakes.
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Lock the doors.
Check the indicator on the
instrument panel to verify that the
security system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
Parking Tips
Parking
Driving
207
０５／０７／２８ １３：５０：０４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２１０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with front
disc brakes. The brakes on the rear
wheels may be disc or drum,
depending on the model. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, increases wear, and reduces
their effectiveness. It also keeps
your brake lights on all the time,
confusing drivers behind you.
The front and rear disc brakes on all
models have audible brake wear
indicators. All models except for the
4-cylinder LX have rear disc brakes
as standard equipment.
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Braking System
Braking System Design
Brake Wear Indicators
208
０５／０７／２８ １３：５０：１５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２１１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the brakes from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-to-
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the indicator comes on while
driving, test the brakes as instructed
on page .278
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS Indicator
Driving
209
０５／０７／２８ １３：５０：２３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２１２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also be shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
It only helps with the
steering control during braking.
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock. Slow down, and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
The VSA indicator will come on
alongwiththeABSindicator.
278
On all V6 models
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
210
０５／０７／２８ １３：５０：３１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２１３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the VSA system indicator comes
on while driving, pull to the side of
theroadwhenitissafe,andturnoff
the engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink.
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output,
and by selectively applying the
brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
Without VSA, your vehicle still has
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it does not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
On all V6 models
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Activation Indicator
VSA System Indicator
Driving
211
０５／０７／２８ １３：５０：４１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２１４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
This switch is under the left vent.
Press it to turn the VSA system on
and off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
Pressing the switch again turns the
system back on.
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
Deactivate the VSA system if you
need to drive with the compact spare
tire installed (see page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
264
258
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA and Tire SizesVSA Off Switch
212
VSA OFF SWITCH
０５／０７／２８ １３：５０：５３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２１５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has been designed to
primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
The
maximum allowable weight of the
trailer and everything in or on it
must not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).
Towing a load that is too heavy
can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
total trailer weight. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to
sway.
CONTINUED
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:
Towing a Trailer
Driving
213
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５１：０３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２１６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
The maximum allowable weight
on the vehicle axles is:
The maximum allowable weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, all
accessories, all cargo, and the
tongue load is:
(LX)
on the front axle
on the rear axle
on the front axle
on the rear axle
(LX)
(EX, EX-L)
(EX, EX-L)
on the front axle
on the rear axle
4-cylinder models:
6-cylinder models:
4-cylinder models:
6-cylinder models:
Checking LoadsGross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
Towing a Trailer
214
2,195 lbs (995 kg)
1,960 lbs (890 kg)
2,360 lbs (1,070 kg)
2,005 lbs (910 kg)
4,080 lbs (1,850 kg)
4,125 lbs (1,870 kg)
4,300 lbs (1,950 kg)
2,225 lbs (1,010 kg)
1,985 lbs (900 kg)
０５／０７／２８ １３：５１：１２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２１７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, how
much load you are towing, and
where you tow.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in this section. Also make
sure that all equipment is properly
installed and maintained, and that it
meets federal, state, province, and
local regulations.
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
Seeyourtrailerdealerformore
information on installing electric
brakes.
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check the
requirements for the areas where
you plan to tow, and use only
equipment designed for your vehicle.
Since lighting and wiring vary by
trailer type and brand, you should
have a qualified technician install a
suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer. Improper
equipment or installation can cause
damage to your vehicle’s electrical
system and affect your vehicle
warranty.
Honda requires that any trailer with
a total weight of 1,000 lbs (455 kg) or
more be equipped with its own
electric or surge-type brakes.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electrically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Hitches
Safety Chains
Trailer Brakes
Trailer Lights
Towing a Trailer
Driving
215
０５／０７／２８ １３：５１：２７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２１８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Askyourtrailersalesorrental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
Additional Towing Equipment
Pre-Tow Checklist
Towing a Trailer
216
０５／０７／２８ １３：５１：３８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２１９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Do not exceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At
higher speeds, the trailer may sway
or affect vehicle handling. If you
have an automatic transmission, use
D position when towing a trailer on
level roads.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D .
Ifyoumuststopwhenfacinguphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed, and shift down to second
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember, it will take longer to slow
downandstopwhentowingatrailer.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
3
CONTINUED
Making Turns and Braking
Towing Speeds and Gears
Driving on Hills
Handling Crosswinds and Buf feting
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Towing a Trailer
Driving
217
０５／０７／２８ １３：５１：５１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２２０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including firmly setting the
parking brake and putting the
transmission in Park (automatic) or
in first or reverse (manual). Also,
place wheel chocks at each of the
trailer’s tires.
bottom
Backing Up
Parking
Towing a Trailer
218
０５／０７／２８ １３：５１：５８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２２１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance messages in the
information display, a maintenance
record, and instructions for simple
maintenance tasks you may want to
take care of yourself.
......................Maintenance Safety . 220
....................Maintenance Minder . 221
....................Maintenance Record . 228
..............................Fluid Locations . 230
........................Adding Engine Oil . 232
.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 233
..............................Engine Coolant . 236
....................Windshield Washers . 238
.......................Transmission Fluid . 239
..........Automatic Transmission . 239
..............Manual Transmission . 242
................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 243
....................Power Steering Fluid . 245
....................................Timing Belt . 246
.............................................Lights . 246
................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 251
.....................................Floor Mats . 251
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 252
.................................Wiper Blades . 252
...............................................Tires . 254
...................Checking the Battery . 260
.............................Vehicle Storage . 262
305
Maintenance
Maintenance
219
０５／０７／２８ １３：５２：０４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２２２
Main Menu
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or other qualified
mechanic.
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison f rom
engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
Injury from moving parts.
220
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５２：１８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２２３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items in the
information display to show you
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and
indicated maintenance service.
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and press the Select/
Reset knob repeatedly until the
engine oil life display appears (see
page ).
The remaining engine oil life is
displayed on the engine oil life
display according to this table:
63
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Lif e Display
Maintenance
221
ENGINE OIL LIFE
DISPLAY
SELECT/RESET
KNOB
０５／０７／２８ １３：５２：２９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２２４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ message
along with the same maintenance
item code(s), every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
227
Maintenance Minder
222
MAINTENANCE
ITEM CODE(S)
ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
０５／０７／２８ １３：５２：３７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２２５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If you still do not perform the
indicated maintenance, you will see a
negative mileage. It is displayed
when you drive over 10 miles (for
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
models) after seeing the 0 percent
message.Afterward,itshowsyour
driving distance if you continue to
drive. Immediately have the
indicated maintenance done by your
dealer.
The maximum total mileage shown
is ‘‘ 9999.’’
You can change the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer, the trip
meter, or the outside temperature (if
equipped) every time you press and
release the Select/Reset knob.
When the engine oil life display is 0
percent or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
remainsonevenifyouchangethe
information display.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described in the next
page.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will be blinking. The display comes
oneverytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. When
you see this message, have the
indicated maintenance performed by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
223
０５／０７／２８ １３：５２：４６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２２６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
All maintenance items displayed in
the information display are in code.
For an explanation of these
maintenance codes, see page .
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
Press the Select/Reset knob
repeatedly until the engine oil life
display is displayed.
Press the Select/Reset knob for
more than 10 seconds. The engine
oil life indicator and the
maintenance item code(s) will
blink.
1.
2.
3.
227
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
224
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM
０５／０７／２８ １３：５２：５７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２２７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
Press the Select/Reset knob for
more than 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
4.
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
Maintenance
225
０５／０７／２８ １３：５３：０７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２２８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
−
−
−
−
−
−U.S. Vehicles:
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
and license plate lights monthly.
See page .
188
189
239
244
256
246
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
226
０５／０７／２８ １３：５３：１８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２２９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
＃
−
＃
Maintenance Minder
227
:
If the message ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ does not appear more than 12 months after
the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .
Independent of themaintenance minder display, replace the brake fluid
every 3 years.
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.
NOTE:
1:
226
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and line (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle
speeds or trailer towing results in higher
transmission and transfer temperatures. This
requires transmission and transfer fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the
maintenance minder. If you regularly drive your
vehicle under these conditions, have the
transmission and transfer fluid changed at
60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km). (For A/T only:)
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
(V6 engine only)
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C), in very low temperatures
(under 110°F, 29°C), replace every 60,000 mile
(U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada).
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
A
B
Symbol Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
Maintenance Minder
０５／０７／２８ １３：５３：２７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２３０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
228
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, recordthe mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
０５／０７／２８ １３：５３：３５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２３１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
Maintenance
229
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
Maintenance
Performed
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
AB12345
０５／０７／２８ １３：５３：４２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２３２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
4-cylinder Models
Fluid Locations
230
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange handle)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
RADIATOR CAP
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE OIL
FILL CAP
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
CLUTCH FLUID
(5-speed manual
transmission only)
(Light gray cap)
０５／０７／２８ １３：５３：４８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２３３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
6-cylinder Models
Fluid Locations
Maintenance
231
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
CLUTCH FLUID
(6-speed manual
transmission only)
(Gray cap)
０５／０７／２８ １３：５３：５４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２３４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Install the engine oil fill cap, and
tighten it securely. Wait a few
minutes, and recheck the oil level.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
Oil is a major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements.
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
232
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
０５／０７／２８ １３：５４：０２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２３５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API Certification Seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
1.
CONTINUED
Synthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Changing the Oil and Filter
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter
Maintenance
233
Ambient Temperature
０５／０７／２８ １３：５４：１５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２３６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Check the oil filter to make sure
its gasket did not stick to the
engine block. A stuck gasket could
cause an oil leak.
4.3.2.
Changing the Oil and Filter
234
4-cylinder models
OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLTWASHER
OIL FILTER
4-cylinder models6-cylinder models
WASHER
０５／０７／２８ １３：５４：２４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２３７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
(4-cylinder models)
(6-cylinder models)
Refill the engine with the
recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
(4-cylinder models)
(6-cylinder models)
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Make sure to clean off any dirt
and dust on the connecting
surface of a new oil filter.
9.
8.
7.
6.
5.
10.
Changing the Oil and Filter
Maintenance
235
OIL FILTER
6-cylinder models
33 lbf·ft (44 N·m , 4.5 kgf·m)
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.4 US qt (4.2
)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５４：３９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２３８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-life Anti-
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant
is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
236
6-cylinder models RESERVE TANK4-cylinder models RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５４：５０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２３９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on, and
tighten it fully.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
4.
1. 3.
2.
5.
CONTINUED
Engine Coolant
Maintenance
237
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP
4-cylinder models
RESERVE TANK
０５／０７／２８ １３：５５：０３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２４０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by
removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page ).
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
60
On Canadian models:
Windshield Washers
Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
238
6-cylinder models
RESERVE TANK
LEVEL GAUGE
4-cylinder models
０５／０７／２８ １３：５５：１３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２４１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
4-cylinder models
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the notch in the rubber
cap fits in the dipstick guide and
that you push the dipstick in all
the way.
1.
2.
3.
Automatic Transmission
Windshield Washers, Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
239
6-cylinder models
LEVEL GAUGE
DIPSTICK
DIPSTICK
GUIDE
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５５：２４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２４２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality.
Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the notch fits in the
dipstick guide and the dipstick is
down all the way.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Shut off the engine.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
5.
4. 6.
1.
2.
6-cylinder models
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission
240
DIPSTICK
０５／０７／２８ １３：５５：３６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２４３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If the level is below the lower
mark, add fluid into the dipstick
hole to bring it to the upper mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality.
Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 as
soon as it is convenient.
Make sure the notch fits in the
dipstick guide and the dipstick is
down all the way.
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your dealer.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Make sure the notch in the rubber
cap fits in the dipstick guide and
that you push the dipstick in all
the way.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Transmission Fluid
Maintenance
241
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
０５／０７／２８ １３：５５：４６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２４４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle
sitting on level ground. Remove
the transmission filler bolt, and
carefully feel inside the bolt hole
with your finger.
Check the fluid level with the
transmission at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground.
The fluid level should be up to the
edge of the bolt hole. If it is not, add
Honda Manual Transmission Fluid
(MTF) until it starts to run out of the
hole. Reinstall the filler bolt, and
tighten it securely.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer. Remove the check bolt and look for
transmission fluid coming out of the
bolt hole. If a small amount of fluid
drips out of the bolt hole, reinstall
the check bolt.
On 4-cylinder models On EX-V6 model
Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Manual Transmission
242
FILLER BOLT
Correct level
CHECK BOLT
WASHER
DRAIN BOLT
０５／０７／２８ １３：５５：５７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２４５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If no fluid comes out, remove the
filler bolt. Slowly add Honda Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) until it
starts to run out of the check bolt
hole. Let the fluid run out until it
stops, then reinstall the check bolt
and the filler bolt.
Pour the fluid into the filler hole
slowly and carefully so you do not
spill. Clean up any spill immediately;
it could damage components in the
engine compartment.
If Honda MTF is not available, you
may use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40
viscosity motor oil with the API
Certification seal that says ‘‘FOR
GASOLINE ENGINES’’ as a
temporary replacement. However,
motor oil does not contain the proper
additives, and continued use can
cause stiffer shifting. Replace as
soon as it is convenient.
If you are not sure how to check and
add fluid, contact your dealer.
Check the fluid level in the
reservoirs monthly. There are up to
two reservoirs, depending on the
model. They are:
Brake fluid reservoir (all models)
Clutch fluid reservoir
(manual transmission only)
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoir monthly.
Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendation in the
maintenance minder schedule.
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Transmission Fluid, Brake and Clutch Fluid
Maintenance
243
FILLER BOLT
WASHER
０５／０７／２８ １３：５６：１０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２４６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
A low fluid level can indicate a leak
in the clutch system. Have this
system inspected as soon as possible.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If it is not, add
brake fluid to bring it up to that level.
Use the same fluid specified for the
brake system.
Manual Transmission only
Brake and Clutch Fluid
Brake System Clutch System
244
MAX
MIN
MAX
MIN
０５／０７／２８ １３：５６：２０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２４７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. You may use another power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Power Steering Fluid
Maintenance
245
UPPER LEVEL
4-cylinder models
LOWER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
UPPER LEVEL
6-cylinder models
Turning the steering wheel to full left
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５６：３０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２４８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustments
should be done by your dealer or
other qualified mechanic.
Open the hood. To change a bulb
on the driver’s side, undo the two
fasteners and remove the air
intake cover.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
If you frequently tow a trailer.
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you
regularly drive your vehicle in one or
more of these conditions:
The timing belt should be replaced
at the intervals shown in the
maintenance minder schedule.
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
1.
6-cylinder models only
Timing Belt, Lights
Headlight Aiming
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Timing Belt
High Beam Headlight
246
FASTENERS
AIR INTAKE
COVER
4-cylinder models
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５６：４４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２４９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Reinstall the air intake cover.
Reinstall the two fasteners and
secure them by pushing on the
heads until they lock.
(Driver’s side)
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Lights
Maintenance
247
6-cylinder models
FASTENERS
4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models
TAB BULB
TAB
BULB
AIR INTAKE
COVER
０５／０７／２８ １３：５６：５６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２５０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the electrical connector
fromthebulbbysqueezingthe
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
To change the low beam headlight
bulb on the driver’s side, remove
the air intake duct. You can reach
the air intake duct from the back
side of the inner fender.
6.
5.
4.
1.
2.
3.
On EX-V6 model with manual
transmission
Low Beam Headlight
Lights
248
AIR INTAKE DUCT
EX-V6 with M/T
HOLDING CLIPS
０５／０７／２８ １３：５７：０７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２５１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Install the new bulb, and turn it
one-quarter turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Reinstall the air intake duct
securely.
(Driver’s side)
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install and lock each holding clip
bypushingonthecenter.
To change the passenger’s side
bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
left, and turn off the engine. To
change the driver’s side bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
1.
3.
2.
4.
9.
7.
8.
11.
10.
CONTINUED
On EX-V6 model with manual
transmission
Replacing a Front Side Marker/
Parking/Turn Signal Light Bulb
Lights
Maintenance
249
HOLDING CLIPS
０５／０７／２８ １３：５７：２１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２５２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the burned out bulb from
thesocketbypushingitinand
turning the bulb counterclockwise
until it unlocks.
Install the new bulb in the socket.
Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install and lock each holding clip
bypushingonthecenter.
Open the trunk.
Remove the light assembly cover
by pulling its outside edge.
Determine which bulb is burned
out: turn signal or back-up light.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Install the light assembly cover.
Make sure it snaps into place.
1.
3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
7.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
Lights
250
COVER
０５／０７／２８ １３：５７：３６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２５３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air dry before
you use the vehicle.
The driver’s and the right-rear
passenger’s floor mats that came
with your vehicle hook over the floor
mat anchors. This keeps the floor
mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals
or making the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
CONTINUED
Floor MatsCleaning the Seat Belts
Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
Maintenance
251
LOOP
０５／０７／２８ １３：５７：４６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２５４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This filter removes the dust and
pollenthatisbroughtinfromthe
outside through the heating and
cooling system/climate control
system.
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
If you remove the floor mats, make
sure to re-anchor them when you put
them back in your vehicle.
If you use non-Honda floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
theycanbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of an anchored mat.
Make sure the right-rear floor mat is
properly hooked to the floor mat
anchor. Your vehicle is equipped
with front passenger’s seat weight
sensors. If the right-rear passenger’s
floor mat is on the seat rail of the
front passenger’s seat, the sensors
will detect the decreased weight on
the seat and they may not work
properly.
Have your dealer replace the filter
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000
km) if you drive primarily in urban
areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and
diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it
more often if airflow from the
heating and cooling system/climate
control system becomes less than
usual. Have the dust and pollen filter
replaced by your dealer.
Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper Blades
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
252
０５／０７／２８ １３：５７：５５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２５５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To replace a wiper blade:
Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield. Raise the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
2.
1.
3.
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
253
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
BLADE
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the wiper arms.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５８：０４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２５６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield, the passenger’s
side first, then the driver’s side.
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Wiper Blades, Tires
Tires
254
BLADE
REINFORCEMENT
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５８：１３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２５７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page .
If you check air pressure when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to6psi(30to40kPa,0.3to0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshoulduseyourowntire
pressure gauge whenever you check
your tire pressures. This will make it
easier for you to tell if a pressure
loss is due to a tire problem and not
due to a variation between gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
256
Tires
Inflation Guidelines
Maintenance
255
０５／０７／２８ １３：５８：２６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２５８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal and high-speed driving
conditions.
Excessive tread wear.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .296
Tire Size/Type
Compact Spare
Cold Tire Pressure
Tire Size/Type
Compact Spare
Cold Tire Pressure
Tire Size/Type
Compact Spare
Cold Tire Pressure
Front:
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
6-cylinder models
Canadian 4-cylinder LX models
All 4-cylinder models except Canadian
LX
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
Tire Inspection
256
P205/65R15 92H
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm )
29 psi (200 kPa ,
2.0 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa ,
4.2 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
29 psi (200 kPa ,
2.0 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa ,
4.2 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
30 psi (210 kPa ,
2.1 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa ,
4.2 kgf/cm
)
P205/60R16 91V
P215/50R17 93V
０５／０７／２８ １３：５８：４２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２５９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide across
the tread. This shows there is less
than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left
on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display. Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated. If
you purchase directional tires, rotate
only front-to-back.
For vehicles with aluminum wheels:
Tires
Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation
Maintenance
257
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Front
Front
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights for
balancing.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５９：０３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２６０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
ABS and vehicle stability assist
system (VSA) to work inconsistently.
TheABSworksbycomparingthe
speed of the wheels. When replacing
tires, use the same size originally
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
Wheels:
Tires:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
for tire size and labeling
information.
294
296
Canadian 4-cylinder LX models
6-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
Canadian 4-cylinder LX models
All models except Canadian 4-cylinder
LX
All 4-cylinder models except Canadian
LX
Replacing Tires and Wheels Wheel and Tire Specif ications
Tires
258
16x61/2JJ
15x61/2JJ
17x61/2JJ
P205/60R16 91V
P205/65R15 92H
P215/50R17 93V
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５９：１８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２６１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Mount tire chains on your tires when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Install them only on the
front tires.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, Honda strongly
recommends using the chains listed
below, made by Security Chain
Company (SCC).
Thesechainsaretheonlyonesthat
have been approved by Honda for
use on your vehicle. Since Honda
cannot test all chains, you must be
personally responsible for proper
selection, installation, and use of tire
chains.
The chains listed here are available
at many auto supply stores. For a
complete list of stores, visit the SCC
website at www.scc-chain.com.
When installing chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with chains installed.
Cable-types: CH2412T
Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134
Cable-types: SCC Radial Chain
CH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030
CONTINUED
LX
EX and EX-L
LX-V6 and EX-V6
Tires
Winter Driving
Snow Tires
Tire Chains
Maintenance
259
０５／０７／２８ １３：５９：３０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２６２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you ever hear the chains
contacting the body or chassis, stop
and investigate. If the chains have
loosened, retighten them. Make sure
they do not contact the brake lines
or suspension.
Removethechainsassoonasyou
begin driving on cleared roads.
Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
future corrosion.
Checking the Battery
Tires, Checking the Battery
260
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
4-cylinder models
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
6-cylinder models
Using the wrong chains, or not
properly installing chains, can
damage the brake lines and
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５９：４１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２６３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
Checking the Battery
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Maintenance
261
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
０５／０７／２８ １３：５９：４７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２６４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in reverse
(manual) or Park (automatic).
Block the rear wheels.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Disconnect the battery.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors.
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fan cycles on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Vehicle Storage
262
０５／０７／２８ １４：００：００ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２６５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 264
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 265
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 270
................................Jump Starting . 272
..............If the Engine Overheats . 274
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 276
..........Charging System Indicator . 276
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 277
...............Brake System Indicator . 278
..................Closing the Moonroof . 279
..............................................Fuses . 280
..............................Fuse Locations . 283
......................Emergency Towing . 285
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
263
０５／０７／２８ １４：００：０５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２６６
Main Menu
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Follow these precautions:
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer. Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road sur-
faces. Use greater caution while
driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
Turn off the VSA system (see
pages and ). Driving with
thecompactsparetiremay
activate the VSA.
211 212
On all V6 models
Compact Spare Tire
264
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
０５／０７／２８ １４：００：１９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２６７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area that is
far away from the traffic lanes.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
Park the vehicle on firm, level and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park (A/T) or
Reverse (M/T). Apply the parking
brake.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
The tools are in the trunk. Open
the trunk and raise the trunk floor
by lifting up on the back edge.
Take the tool kit out of the trunk.
Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
5.
4.
3.
2.
1.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
265
TRUNK FLOOR
SPARE TIRE JACK
TOOL KIT
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
０５／０７／２８ １４：００：３１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２６８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The jack is behind a cover in the
right fender. Remove the cover by
turning the handle counterclock-
wise, then pulling on the cover.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
6.
7.
8.
Changing a Flat Tire
266
JACK
WHEEL NUT
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
０５／０７／２８ １４：００：４０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２６９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Place the jack under the jacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
Remove the wheel nuts, then
remove the flat tire. Handle the
wheel nuts carefully; they may be
hot from driving. Place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface facing up.
Do not attempt to forcibly pry the
wheel cover off with a screwdriver or
other tool. The wheel cover cannot
be removed without first removing
the wheel nuts.
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
9. 10.
11.
On Canadian 4-cylinder LX model
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
267
JACKING POINT
WHEEL COVER
WHEEL NUTS
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
EXTENSION
０５／０７／２８ １４：００：５１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２７０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
13. 14.12.
Changing a Flat Tire
268
BRAKE HUB
０５／０７／２８ １４：００：５９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２７１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
Securetheflattirebyscrewing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
15. 16. 17.
18.
19.
All models except Canadian 4-cylinder
LX
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
269
WING BOLT
SPACER CONE
For
spare
tire
For
normal
tire
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
０５／０７／２８ １４：０１：１０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２７２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Replace the cover. Store the
tools.
Store the wheel cover or center
cap in the trunk. Make sure it does
not get scratched or damaged.
Lower the trunk floor, then close
the trunk lid.
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound or series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check these things:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
Check the transmission interlock.
If you have a manual transmission,
the clutch pedal must be pushed
all the way to the floor or the
starter will not operate. With an
automatic transmission, it must be
in Park or neutral.
20.
21.
22.
272
If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Jump Starting
Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start
270
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
０５／０７／２８ １４：０１：２４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２７３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See
on page .
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem (see
on page ).
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of the
battery and terminal connections
(see page ). You can then try
jump starting the vehicle from a
booster battery (see page ).
59
199
280
285
285
272
260
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Emergency
Towing
The Starter Operates Normally
Starting the
Engine
Emergency Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
271
０５／０７／２８ １４：０１：３５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２７４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
You cannot start your vehicle with an
automatic transmission by pushing
or pulling it.
To jump start your vehicle:
The numbers in the illustrations
show you the order to connect the
jumper cables.
Turn off all the electrical acces-
sories: heater, A/C, climate
control, stereo system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral
(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
parking brake.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
1.
2.
Jump Starting
272
4-cylinder models
BOOSTER
BATTERY
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
０５／０７／２８ １４：０１：４７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２７５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−＋
＋
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive ( )
terminal on the booster battery.
6.
5.
4.3.
CONTINUED
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
273
6-cylinder models4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
BOOSTER
BATTERY
０５／０７／２８ １４：０１：５９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２７６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keep the ends of the jumper
cables away from each other and
any metal on the vehicle until
everything is disconnected.
Otherwise, you may cause an
electrical short.
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
Once the vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
and then from the booster battery.
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
If it climbs to the red mark, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral
(M/T) or Park (A/T), and set the
parking brake. Turn off all
accessories, and turn on the
hazard warning lights.
2.
1.
7.
Jump Starting, If the Engine Overheats
If the Engine Overheats
274
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
０５／０７／２８ １４：０２：０９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２７７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the
temperature gauge or lower
before checking the radiator.
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you do not find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant
if the level is below the MIN mark.
Start the engine, and set the
temperature to maximum heat
(climate control to AUTO at
‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck. If you do not have the
proper coolant mixture available,
you can add plain water.
Remember to have the cooling
system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
can.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
3.
4.
5.
285
285
IftheEngineOverheats
Emergency
TowingEmergency
Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
275
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
０５／０７／２８ １４：０２：２２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２７８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator should never come on
when the engine is running. If it
starts flashing or stays on, the oil
pressure has dropped very low or
lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Start the engine, and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
If the charging system indicator
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, the battery is not being
charged.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
1.
2.
3.
4.
188
232
285
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Emergency Towing
Charging System
Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
276
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
０５／０７／２８ １４：０２：３４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２７９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emissions control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause
increased emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
If your vehicle battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes at least
three days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks 5 times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to
for more
information (see page ).
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
This indicator may also come on with
the ‘‘D’’ indicator.
If the indicator comes on repeatedly,
even though it may turn off as you
continue driving, have the vehicle
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on
the information display. Tighten the
cap until it clicks at least once (see
page ). Tightening the cap will
not turn the indicator off
immediately; it takes several days
of normal driving.
300
186
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
State
Emissions Testing
Readiness Codes
Taking Care of the Unexpected
277
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and the engine. Those repairs
may not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
０５／０７／２８ １４：０２：４６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２８０
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
The brake system indicator normally
comes on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position and as
a reminder to check the parking
brake. It will stay on if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
244
285
Brake System Indicator
Emergency
Towing
278
U.S. Canada
０５／０７／２８ １４：０２：５５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２８１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you need to close the moonroof
manually, it means the moonroof
opening/closing function is
developing a problem. Have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
Remove the wrench. Reinstall the
round plug.
To remove the round plug in the
center of the headliner, turn the
plug by using a screwdriver or
coin, then pry it out. Make sure to
align the tabs on the round plug to
the notches on the ceiling as
shown in the illustration.
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
Check the fuse for the moonroof
motor (see page ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
Try closing the moonroof. If the
new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually.
Get the moonroof wrench out of
the tool kit in the trunk.
Insert the moonroof wrench into
the socket behind the plug. Turn
the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.
4.
3.
1.
2.
5.
6.
284
If equipped
Closing the Moonroof
Taking Care of the Unexpected
279
SOCKET
ROUND PLUG
TAB
NOTCH
MOONROOF WRENCH
０５／０７／２８ １４：０３：０６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２８２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The under-hood fuse box is on the
driver’s side. To open it, push the
tabs as shown.
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
and check if the device works.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.The interior fuse box is on the
driver’s lower left side. To remove
the fuse box lid, put your finger in
the notch on the lid, and pull it
upward slightly, then pull it toward
you and take it out of its hinges.
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in
two fuse boxes.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
1.
2.
283 284
Checking and Replacing Fuses
Fuses
280
INTERIOR
UNDER-HOOD
TAB
NOTCH
０５／０７／２８ １４：０３：１６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２８３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse box by
pulling out each one with the fuse
puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the side window
at the wire inside. Removing these
fuses requires a Phillips-head
screwdriver.
3. 4.
CONTINUED
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
281
BLOWN
BLOWN
FUSE
FUSE PULLER
０５／０７／２８ １４：０３：２６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２８４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
oneofthesparefusesofthesame
rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified mechanic.
If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window will be disabled. To
reset the AUTO function, see page
.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself.
Thenexttimeyouturnonthe
radio you will see ‘‘CODE/COdE’’
in the frequency display. Use the
preset bars to enter the code (see
page ).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.5.
6.
92
172
Fuses
282
BLOWN
FUSE
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement fuse with the proper rating
for the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
０５／０７／２８ １４：０３：３６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２８５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＋
＊
＊
＊
No. Amps.
CONTINUED
Amps. Circuits Protected
Amps.No. Circuits Protected
No. Circuits Protected
1: All except U.S. 4-cylinder LX model
2: 4-cylinder models
3: 6-cylinder models
6
7
8
9
10
10 A
7.5 A
15 A
20 A
10 A
30 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
Right Headlight Low Beam
Back Up
FI ECU (ECM/PCM)
Condenser Fan
Not Used
20 A
30 A
7.5 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
30 A
30 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
100 A
50 A
50 A
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan
MG. Clutch
Horn, Stop
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
Hazard
ABS Motor
VSA Motor
ABS Unit
VSA Unit
Option
Option
Heater Motor
Battery
Not Used
BIG1Main
Power Window Main
1
2
3
4
5
Left Headlight Low Beam
Rear Defroster Coil
Left Headlight High Beam
Small Light
Right Headlight High Beam
2
3
2
3
2
3
1
1
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
283
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
０５／０７／２８ １４：０３：４６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２８６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
No. Amps.No.
No.
Amps. Circuits ProtectedCircuits Protected
Amps. Circuits Protected
: All except 4-cylinder LX model
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
30 A
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
15 A
15 A
10 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
10 A
Door Lock
Front Accessory Sockets
OPDS (Occupant Position
Detection System)
IG Wiper
Not Used
Not Used
DBW
Ignition Coil
Daytime Running Light
Laf Heater
Radio
Interior Light
Back Up
20 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Heated Seats
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining
Not Used
ACG
Fuel Pump
Washer
Meter
SRS
IGP
Not Used
Not Used
Passenger’s Power Window
Driver’s Power Window
Moonroof
Not Used
A/C
Not Used
ACC
Not Used
Fuse Locations
284
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
０５／０７／２８ １４：０３：５７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２８７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
If, due to damage, your vehicle must
be towed with the front wheels on
the ground, do this:
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission to neutral.
The operator
loads your vehicle on the back of a
truck.
Therearetwowaystotowyour
vehicle:
With the front wheels on the ground,
do not tow the vehicle more than 50
miles (80 km), and keep the speed
below35mph(55km/h).
If your vehicle is equipped with a
front spoiler, remove it before
towing so it is not damaged.
The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front) and lift them
off the ground. The other two tires
remain on the ground.
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
ShifttoD,thentoN.
Turn off the engine.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
Leave the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) position so the
steering wheel does not lock.
CONTINUED
Manual Transmission:
Automatic Transmission:
Emergency Towing
Flat-bed Equipment
Wheel-lift Equipment
This is the best way to trans-
port your vehicle.
This is an
acceptable way to tow your
vehicle.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
285
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shift the transmission or start the
engine (automatic transmission), your
vehicle must be transported with the
front wheels off the ground.
０５／０７／２８ １４：０４：１５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２８８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emergency Towing
286
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
position, and make sure the steering
wheel turns freely before you begin
towing.
Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the vehicle’s weight.
０５／０７／２８ １４：０４：２０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２８９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 288
Specifications
..................(4-cylinder Models) . 290
Specifications
..................(6-cylinder Models) . 292
DOT Tire Quality Grading
.....................(U.S.Vehicles) .294
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 294
.................................Treadwear . 294
......................................Traction . 294
.............................Temperature . 295
.................................Tire Labeling . 296
.......................Emissions Controls . 297
.....................The Clean Air Act . 297
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 297
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 297
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 297
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 298
....................PGM-FI System . 298
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 298
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 298
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 298
....................Replacement Parts . 298
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 299
..............State Emissions Testing . 300
Technical Information
Technical Information
287
０５／０７／２８ １４：０４：２５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２９０
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
Identification Numbers
288
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
０５／０７／２８ １４：０４：３１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２９１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
289
AUTOMATIC/MANUAL TRANSMISSION NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
6-cylinder Models
MANUAL
TRANSMISSION
NUMBER
ENGINE NUMBER
4-cylinder Models
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
０５／０７／２８ １４：０４：３７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２９２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications (4-cylinder Models)
290
Dimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Capacities
187.8 in (4,770 mm)
71.3 in (1,810 mm)
55.7 in (1,415 mm)
105.1 in (2,670 mm)
61.1 in (1,553 mm)
61.2 in (1,554 mm)
1.88 US gal (7.1 )
1.90 US gal (7.2 )
1.32 US gal (5.0 )
1.35 US gal (5.1 )
5.6 US qt (5.3 )
HFC-134a (R-134a)
17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.2 US qt (4.0
)
ND-OIL8 2.0 US qt (1.9 )
2.2 US qt (2.1
)
3.0 US qt (2.8 )
6.9 US qt (6.5
)
2.6 US qt (2.5 )
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
17.09 US gal (64.7
)
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Manual trans-
mission fluid
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Front
Rear
Approx.
1:
2:
Change
Manual
Automatic
Total
Manual
Automatic
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada Vehicles
1
2
０５／０７／２８ １４：０４：５６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２９３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications (4-cylinder Models)
Technical Inf ormation
291
EngineLights
Battery
Fuses
Alignment
Tires
12 V 24/2.2 CP
12 V
12 V
60 W (HB3)
51 W (HB4)
12 V 21 W
3.43 x 3.90 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)
144 cu-in (2,354 cm )
9.7 : 1
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Headlights
Front turn signal/parking/side
marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
Trunk light
Door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror lights
Spotlights
12 V 18 W
12 V 3 CP
12 V 8 W
12 V 5 W
12 V 2 CP
12 V 1.1 W
12 V 8 W
Capacity 12 V 38 AH/5 HR
12 V 47 AH/20 HR
Interior
Under-hood
Water cooled 4-stroke DOHC i-VTEC
4-cylinder gasoline engine
See page 284 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid.
See page 283 or the fuse box
cover.
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
T135/90D15 100M
P205/60R16 91V
P205/65R15 92H
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
Size
Pressure
3°15’
1°
0°
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
NGK:
DENSO:
SKJ20DRM13
SKJ20DRM11
IZFR6K13
IZFR6K11
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
High
Low
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
4 : Canadian LX models
2 : Californian models with automatic transmission
1 : All models except Californian models with automatic transmission
3 : All models except Canadian LX
3
4
3
4
3
4
1
2
1
2
０５／０７／２８ １４：０５：２４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２９４
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications (6-cylinder Models)
292
Dimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Capacities
61.1 in (1,553 mm)
61.2 in (1,554 mm)
17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)
HFC-134a (R-134a)
ND-OIL8
2.6 US qt (2.5
)
4.8 US qt (4.5 )
7.6 US qt (7.2
)
3.1 US qt (2.9
)
5.3 US qt (5.0
)
4.2 US qt (4.0
)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
0.16 US gal (0.6
)
1.77 US gal (6.7
)
2.22 US gal (8.4 )
105.1 in (2,670 mm) 1.74 US gal (6.6 )
187.8 in (4,770 mm)
71.3 in (1,810 mm)
55.8 in (1,418 mm)
2.17 US gal (8.2 )
2.3 US qt (2.2
)
2.6 US qt (2.5
)
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Gross vehicle weight rating
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Manual
transmission
fluid
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Windshield
washer
reservoir
Front
Rear
Approx.
1:
2:
Change
Manual
Automatic
Total
Manual
Automatic
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
Total
U.S. Vehicles
Canada Vehicles
1
2
０５／０７／２８ １４：０５：４０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２９５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
Specifications (6-cylinder Models)
Technical Inf ormation
293
Engine
Alignment
Lights
Battery
Fuses
Tires
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
51 W (HB4)
24/2.2 CP
21 W
3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)
183 cu-in (2,997 cm )
10.0 : 1
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
1°
3°15’
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC VTEC
6-cylinder gasoline engine
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
NGK:
DENSO:
IZFR6K11
SKJ20DRM11
Headlights
Front turn signal/parking/side
marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
Ceiling light
Trunk light
Door courtesy lights
Vanity mirror lights
Spotlights
12 V 18 W
12 V 3 CP
12 V 8 W
12 V 5 W
12 V 2 CP
12 V 1.1 W
12 V 8 W
Capacity
12 V
12 V
65 AH/20 HR
52 AH/5 HR
Interior
Under-hood
P215/50R17 93VSize
Pressure
T135/90D15 100M
T135/80R16 101M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
See page 284 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box lid.
See page 283 or the fuse box
cover.
60 W (HB3)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
High
Low
1:
2:
LX-V6, EX-V6 with automatic transmission
EX-V6 with manual transmission
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Spare
1
2
０５／０７／２８ １４：０６：０５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２９６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
294
０５／０７／２８ １４：０６：１６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２９７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade
C corresponds to a level of
performance that all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature A,B,C
Technical Information
295
０５／０７／２８ １４：０６：２１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２９８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).
Tire width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Rim diameter in inches.
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Date of manufacture.
The maximum air
pressure the tire can
hold.
The maximum load
thetirecancarryat
maximum air
pressure.
Tire type code.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like this example:
P
R
V
16
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
205
60
91
Max Press
Max Load
Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Tire Identif ication Number
Maximum Tire Pressure
Maximum Tire Load
296
P205/60R16 91V
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
０５／０７／２８ １４：０６：４０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０２９９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons.
Controlling the production of NOx,
CO, and HC is important to the
environment. Under certain
conditions of sunlight and climate,
NOx and HC react to form
photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon
monoxide does not contribute to
smog creation, but it is a poisonous
gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
Emissions Controls
The Clean Air Act
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
Technical Information
297
０５／０７／２８ １４：０６：５１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３００
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection. It has three
subsystems: air intake, engine
control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM) in
automatic transmission vehicles or
the engine control module (ECM) in
manual transmission vehicles uses
various sensors to determine how
much air is going into the engine. It
then controls how much fuel to inject
under all operating conditions. The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
2
2
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Ignition Timing Control System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
298
０５／０７／２８ １４：０７：０４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３０１
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
299
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS
０５／０７／２８ １４：０７：１４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３０２
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park
(automatic transmission) or
Neutral (manual transmission).
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm,andholditthereuntilthe
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4ofthescale(about3minutes).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your dealer.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes.
Drive on the highway in D (A/T)
or fifth/sixth (M/T). Do not use
thecruisecontrol.Whentraffic
allows, drive for 90 seconds
without moving the accelerator
pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary
slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot
do this for a continuous 90
seconds because of traffic
conditions, drive for at least 30
seconds, then repeat it two more
times (for a total of 90 seconds).
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
300
０５／０７／２８ １４：０７：２５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３０３
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Customer Service
................................Information . 302
....................Warranty Coverages . 303
Reporting Safety Defects
...........................(U.S. vehicles) . 304
.....................Authorized Manuals . 305
Warranty and Customer Relations
Warranty and Customer Relations
301
０５／０７／２８ １４：０７：２８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３０４
Main Menu
Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
U.S. Owners:
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle identification number (see
page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and
telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
288
Customer Service Information
302
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7028
０５／０７／２８ １４：０７：３９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３０５
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
coveredfortheusefullifeofthe
vehicle.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
covers all Honda
replacement parts against defects in
materials and workmanship.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2006 Honda Warranty Information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2006 Warranty
Manual that came with your vehicle.
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Replacement Muff ler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Warranty and Customer Relations
303
０５／０７／２８ １４：０７：５２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３０６
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153);
go to
http://www.safercar.gov; o
r
write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400
Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
304
０５／０７／２８ １４：０７：５７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３０７
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
６
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
(credit card orders only)
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)
Authorized Manuals
305
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Publication
Form Number
61SDA08
61SDA09
61SDA08EL
61SDA30
31SDN630
31SDA730
31SDAM10
31SDNQ30
HON-R
Form Description
2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4
Service Manual Base Book
2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door V6
Service Manual Supplement
2006 Honda Accord Navigation System
Owner’s Manual
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
Price
Each
$75.00
$45.00
$50.00
$44.00
$35.00
$29.00
$12.00
$12.00
FREE
2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4/V6
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2003-2006 Honda Accord 2/4 door L4/V6
Body Repair Manual
2006 Honda Accord 2 door Owner’s Manual
2006 Honda Accord Honda Service History
2006 Honda Accord 2-door Quick Start Guide
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich.Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.95
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
www. helminc. com
０５／０７／２８ １４：０８：１１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３０８
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Authorized Manuals
Service Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Body Repair Manual:
306
NOTE: Dealers andCompanies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the nameof the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & ZipCode
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable toHelm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shippingaddress shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo.Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. BoxNumber
()
These Publications cannotbe returned for creditwithoutreceiving advance authorization within 14
days ofdelivery. On returns,a restocking fee may beapplied against theoriginal order.
０５／０７／２８ １４：０８：２３ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３０９
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 57, 276
............................Jump Starting . 272
..............................Maintenance . 260
....................Specifications . 291, 293
..............................Before Driving . 183
....................................Belts,Seat .8,17
...........................Beverage Holders . 98
..................................Booster Seats . 47
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 209
.............Break-in, New Linings . 184
...........................................Fluid . 243
.........................................Parking . 96
..........................System Design . 208
.................System Indicator . 58, 278
........................Wear Indicators . 208
.............................Braking System . 208
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 184
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 71
........................Brights, Headlights . 69
....................................Accessories . 191
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 76
............Accessory Power Sockets . 100
................Adding Engine Coolant . 236
Additional Information About Your
.........................................Airbags . 21
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 233
.......Adjusting the Steering Wheel . 73
...........................Advanced Airbags . 25
.........Advice for Pregnant Women . 15
...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 21
..............Air Conditioning System . 106
.........................Manual System . 108
.....................Automatic System . 113
Automatic System with
.................navigation system . 117
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 256
.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 184
All Children Should Sit in a
.....................................Back Seat . 33
......................................Antifreeze . 236
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
...............................Indicator . 59, 209
...................................Operation . 209
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 172
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 76
............................................Armrest . 85
................................Audio System . 124
.................AM/FM/CD Player . 126
.............AM/FM/CD Changer . 136
AM/FM/CD Changer with
.................navigation system . 149
...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 70
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 19
..Automatic Climate Control . 113, 117
.............Automatic Speed Control . 175
..............Automatic Transmission . 203
..................Capacity, Fluid . 290, 292
.......Checking Fluid Level . 239, 240
.......................................Shifting . 203
Shift Lever Position
...............................Indicators . 203
................Shift Lever Positions . 204
....................Shift Lock Release . 206
Index
A B
INDEX
I
０５／０７／２８ １４：０８：２９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３１０
Main Menu
................DANGER, Explanation of . ii
...................................Dashboard . 3, 54
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 250
................Front Parking Lights . 249
.................................Headlights . 246
....................Specifications . 291, 293
............Turn Signal Lights . 249, 250
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 246
...................Capacities Chart . 290, 292
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 50
....................Cargo, How to Carry . 193
......................................Cargo Net . 196
.............................Carrying Cargo . 193
..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii
.........................................CD Care . 169
...........................CD Changer .141, 155
CD Changer Error
....................Messages .133, 146, 160
.......................................CD Player . 129
.........CD Player Error Messages . 132
...........................Center CD Pocket . 99
........................Certification Label . 288
.................................Chains, Tires . 259
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 265
Changing Oil
........................................How to . 233
......................................When to . 221
...Charging System Indicator . 57, 276
..............Check Fuel Cap Indicator . 65
............Checklist, Before Driving . 198
.....................................Child Safety . 32
..............................Booster Seats . 47
.............................Child Seats . 32, 39
Important Safety
.........................Reminders . 32, 37
..........................................Infants . 37
..........................Larger Children . 46
.........................................LATCH . 41
......................Risks with Airbags . 33
.............................Small Children . 38
.........................................Tethers . 45
.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 33
.......................................Child Seats . 39
......................................Installing . 40
.........................................LATCH . 41
......................................Selecting . 39
................Tether Anchor Points . 45
Cleaning
...................................Seat Belts . 251
.......Climate Control System . 113, 117
..............................................Clock . 173
...................................Clutch Fluid . 244
........................CO in the Exhaust . 297
...................................Coin Pocket . 100
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 199
......................Compact Spare Tire . 264
...................Console Compartment . 99
.................Consumer Information . 302
.............Controls, Instruments and . 53
Coolant
........................................Adding . 236
....................................Checking . 189
.........................Proper Solution . 236
...................Temperature Gauge . 64
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 297
................Cruise Control Indicator . 62
............Cruise Control Operation . 175
....................Cruise Main Indicator . 62
.....................................Cup Holders . 98
....Customer Service Information . 302
Index
C
D
II
０５／０７／２８ １４：０８：３６ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３１１
Main Menu
＊
..............................Economy, Fuel . 190
..................................Emergencies . 263
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 272
...........Brake System Indicator . 278
................Changing a Flat Tire . 265
.....Charging System Indicator . 276
..................Checking the Fuses . 280
.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 71
............................Jump Starting . 272
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 276
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 277
...Manually Closing Moonroof . 279
..................Overheated Engine . 274
.......................................Towing . 285
...........................Emergency Brake . 96
......................Emergency Flashers . 71
......................Emergency Towing . 285
............Emergency Trunk Opener . 81
.......................Emissions Controls . 297
.............Emissions Testing, State . 300
Engine
............Adding Engine Coolant . 236
....................................Additives . 233
.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 233
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 64
.........................If It Won’t Start . 270
Malfunction Indicator
......................................Lamp . 277
.........................Oil Life Display . 221
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 57, 276
.............................Oil, Synthetic . 233
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 232
...............................Overheating . 274
....................Specifications . 291, 293
....................Speed Limiter . 202, 205
.......................................Starting . 199
..........Engine Speed Limiter . 202, 205
......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 184
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 297
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 50
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 15
................Daytime Running Lights . 70
Daytime Running Lights
.......................................Indicator . 60
.................................Dead Battery . 272
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 304
................Defogger, Rear Window . 72
Defrosting the
....................Windows . 111, 115, 120
............................Dimensions . 290, 292
...............Dimming the Headlights . 69
Dipstick
.Automatic Transmission . 239, 240
..........................Engine Oil . 188, 189
..........................Directional Signals . 69
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 208
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 235
....Door and Trunk Open Monitor . 61
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 77
......................Power Door Locks . 77
........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 294
Downshifting, Manual
.............................Transmission . 200
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5
...........................................Driving . 197
....................................Economy . 190
..........Dual Temperature Control . 121
..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 252
Index
INDEX
E
III
０５／０７／２８ １４：０８：４１ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３１２
Main Menu
...................Fan Control . 108, 114, 119
.........................................Features . 105
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 185
Filters
.........................Dust and Pollen . 252
...............................................Oil . 233
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 71
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 265
Fluids
.Automatic Transmission . 239, 240
..........................................Brake . 243
.........................................Clutch . 244
..............Manual Transmission . 242
..........................Power Steering . 245
..................Windshield Washer . 238
...........................Folding Rear Seat . 88
..........................Four-way Flashers . 71
........................Front Airbags . 9, 21, 23
..................................Front Seat . 82, 84
................................Adjusting . 82, 84
.........................................Heaters . 90
.....................................Airbags .
9,
23
.................................................Fuel . 184
..........Che
ck Fuel Cap Indicator . 65
......................Fill Door and Cap . 185
...........................................Gauge . 64
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 60
................Octane Requirement . 184
...............................Oxygenated . 184
........................Tank, Refueling . 185
...............................Fuel Economy . 190
..............................Fuse Locations . 283
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 280
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 190
..........................................Gasohol . 184
.........................................Gasoline . 184
...........................................Gauge . 64
.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 60
................Octane Requirement . 184
........................Tank, Refueling . 185
................Gas Station Procedures . 185
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 64
...............................................Fuel . 64
...............................Speedometer . 63
.................................Tachometer . 63
Gearshift Lever Positions
..........Automatic Transmission . 203
..............Manual Transmission . 200
........................................Glove Box . 98
Gross Axle Weight Rating
.....................................(GAWR) . 214
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
.....................................(GVWR) . 214
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 246
..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 71
........................................Headlights . 69
........................................Aiming . 246
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 70
............Daytime Running Lights . 70
..................High Beam Indicator . 60
....................Lights On Indicator . 60
............Low Beams, Turning on . 69
.........................Reminder Chime . 69
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 246
...................................Turning on . 69
..............................Head Restraints . 87
.....................Heating and Cooling . 106
...............................Heated Mirrors . 96
Index
G
H
F
IV
０５／０７／２８ １４：０８：４７ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３１３
Main Menu
＊＊
..................................................Keys . 74
.....................................Heater, Seat . 90
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 199
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 178
..Hood, Opening and Closing the . 186
..................................................Horn . 67
...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 244
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 267
.......................................Jack, Tire . 266
................................Jump Starting . 272
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 288
..............If the Engine Overheats . 274
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 270
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 74
...........................................Switch . 76
............Timing Control System . 298
........................Immobilizer System . 75
.........Important Safety Precautions . 6
...................................Indicators . 55, 56
.......ABS (Anti-lock Brake) . 59, 209
Brake (Parking and Brake
............................System) . 58, 278
................Charging System . 57, 276
...........................Check Fuel Cap . 65
.............................Cruise Control . 62
................Door and Trunk Open . 61
DRL (Daytime Running
......................................Lights) . 60
...................................High Beam . 60
........Key (Immobilizer System) . 59
.....................................Lights On . 60
......................................Low Fuel . 60
................Low Oil Pressure . 57, 276
..................Maintenance Minder . 61
..............Malfunction Lamp . 57, 277
.................Passenger Airbag Off . 29
.................Seat Belt Remider . 17, 57
..........................Security System . 61
...........................Side Airbag Off . 58
...............................................SRS . 58
Turn Signal and Hazard
...................................Warning . 59
VSA (Vehicle Stability
..............................Assist) . 62, 211
..........................Washer Level . 60
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 57
...............................Infant Restraint . 37
......................................Infant Seats . 37
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 255
........Recommended Pressures . 256
........................Information Display . 63
...........................Check Fuel Cap . 65
..........................Engine Oil Life . 221
...................Maintenance Items . 224
.....................................Odometer . 63
.................Outside Temperature . 65
.....................................Tripmeter . 64
...................................Inside Mirror . 95
.............................Inspection, Tire . 256
....................Installing a Child Seat . 40
............................Instrument Panel . 55
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 71
..............Instruments and Controls . 53
...............................Interior Lights . 102
........................................Introduction . i
Index
J
K
I
INDEX
V
０５／０７／２８ １４：０８：５５ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３１４
Main Menu
.....................................Net, Cargo . 196
...................Neutral Gear Position . 204
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 184
.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 201
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 288
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 184
.........................................Odometer . 63
Oil
........................Change, How to . 233
......................Change, When to . 221
......................Checking Engine . 188
..............Pressure Indicator . 57, 276
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 233
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 76
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 297
..............................Outside Mirrors . 95
.......................Label, Certification . 288
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 69
..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 14, 17
...........LATCH Anchorage System . 41
..Lighting Off Feature, Automatic . 70
Lights
....................Bulb Replacement . 246
.................................Indicator . 55, 56
.........................................Parking . 69
..................................Turn Signal . 69
....................................Load Limits . 194
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 76
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 76
............................Fuel Fill Door . 185
....................................Glove Box . 98
.................................Power Door . 77
...........................................Trunk . 81
................Low Coolant Level . 189, 236
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 60
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 57, 276
................................Lower Anchors . 41
Lubricant Specifications
..................................Chart . 290, 292
...........Luggage, Storing (Cargo) . 193
...........Luggage Net (Cargo Net) . 196
..................................Maintenance . 219
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 226
........................................Record . 228
.................................Minder . 66, 221
.........................Minder Indicator . 61
..........................................Safety . 220
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 57, 277
...................Manual Transmission . 200
...............Checking Fluid Level . 242
.......................Reverse Lockout . 202
.......................................Shifting . 200
Manual Transmission
...........................................Fluid . 242
....................................Mats, Floor . 251
...............................Meters, Gauges . 63
...................Methanol in Gasoline . 184
..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 95
...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 192
.........................................Moonroof . 94
......................Closing Manually . 279
.....................................Operation . 94
Index
O
N
M
L
VI
０５／０７／２８ １４：０９：０２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３１５
Main Menu
＊
＊
CONTINUED
.....................Outside Temperature . 65
....................Overheating, Engine . 274
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 226
..........................Oxygenated Fuel . 184
...................Radiator Overheating . 274
Radio/CD Sound
........................................System . 124
.................Radio Theft Protection . 172
...........................Readiness Codes . 277
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 250
............................Rear Seat Access . 85
..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 88
............................Rear View Mirror . 95
.................Rear Window Defogger . 72
.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 82, 84
Recommended Shift
........................................Speeds . 201
...Recommended Tire Pressures . 256
........................................Refueling . 185
.................Reminder Indicators . 55, 56
.......................Remote Transmitter . 78
Replacement Information
..............Dust and Pollen Filter . 252
................Engine Oil and Filter . 233
..........................................Fuses . 280
................................Light Bulbs . 246
....................................Schedule . 221
......................Tires and Wheels . 258
.............................Wiper Blades . 252
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 20
..........Reporting Safety Defects . 304
Reserve Tank, Engine
...............................Coolant . 189, 236
...............................Restraint, Child . 32
..............Panel Brightness Control . 71
........................Park Gear Position . 204
...........................................Parking . 207
.................................Parking Brake . 96
Parking Brake and Brake System
...............................Indicator . 58, 278
.................................Parking Lights . 69
Parking Over Things that
............................................Burn . 299
Passenger Airbag Off
.......................................Indicator . 29
.............................PGM-FI System . 298
Playing the,
..........AM/FM Radio . 126, 136, 150
......XM
Saterllite Radio . 139, 153
.............................CDs . 129, 141, 155
...........................Tape . 134, 147, 161
..................................Pocket, Coin . 100
...................................Pollen Filter . 252
..........................Power Door Locks . 77
...............Power Socket Locations . 100
....................Power Steering Fluid . 245
..............................Power Windows . 91
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 15
........................Preparing to Drive . 198
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11
...Additional Safety Precautions . 16
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 15
..................Protecting Children . 32, 37
.......................Protecting Infants . 37
.......Protecting Larger Children . 46
.........Protecting Small Children . 38
Using Child Seats with
.....................................Tethers . 45
.............................Using LATCH . 41
Index
INDEX
R
P
VII
０５／０７／２８ １４：０９：０９ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３１６
Main Menu
＊
＊
..................Reverse Gear Position . 204
...........................Reverse Lockout . 202
......................................Roof Rack . 195
................................Rotation, Tire . 257
..................................Safety Belts . 8, 17
.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 304
.................................Safety Features . 7
.....................................Airbags . 9, 21
.................................Seat Belts . 8, 17
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 51
...............................Safety Messages . ii
.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 17
...............Additional Information . 17
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 19
.....................................Cleaning . 251
................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 17
................................Maintenance . 19
Reminder Indicator and
................................Beeper . 17, 57
...................System Components . 17
...............Use During Pregnancy . 15
Wearing a Lap/Shoulder
.....................................Belt . 14, 17
....................................Seat Heaters . 90
.................................................Seats . 82
.........................Seats, Folding Rear . 88
............................Security System . 174
....................Select/Reset Knob . 63,71
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 39
...............................Serial Number . 288
...........................Service Intervals . 227
...........................Service Manual . 305
.........Service Station Procedures . 185
..........................Setting the Clock . 173
...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 203
........................Shift Lock Release . 206
....................................Side Airbags . 26
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
......................Side Curtain Airbags . 28
How Your Side Curtain
..........................Airbags Work . 28
...............................Signaling Turns . 69
..................................Snow Chains . 259
.....................................Snow Tires . 259
............Socket, Accessory Power . 100
................................Sound System . 124
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 264
....................Specifications . 291, 293
............................Spark Plugs . 291, 293
........................Specifications . 290, 292
................................Speed Control . 175
........................Speed Limiter . 202, 205
..........SRS, Additional Information . 21
...Additional Safety Precautions . 31
.............................Airbag Service . 30
......Airbag System Components . 21
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
How the Side Airbags Off
......................Indicator Works . 29
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 23
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 26
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 28
.............................SRS Indicator . 28, 58
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 76
Index
S
VIII
０５／０７／２８ １４：０９：１４ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３１７
Main Menu
＊
CONTINUED
......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 250
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 263
Technical Descriptions
....DOT Tire Quality Grading . 294
.....Emissions Control Systems . 297
.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 184
Three Way Catalytic
.......................Converter . 298, 299
.........Temperature Control, Dual . 121
.......................Temperature Gauge . 64
........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 123
....................Temperature, Outside . 65
.....................Tether Anchor Points . 45
................Theft Protection, Radio . 172
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 298, 299
..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 73
..........................Time, Setting the . 173
....................................Timing Belt . 246
....................................Tire Chains . 259
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 265
...........................Tire Information . 296
...............................................Tires . 254
..............................Air Pressure . 256
........................................Chains . 259
.........................Checking Wear . 257
..........................Compact Spare . 264
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 294
......................................Inflation . 255
..................................Inspection . 256
.....................................Labeling . 296
..............................Maintenance . 257
...................................Replacing . 258
......................................Rotating . 257
...........................................Snow . 259
....................Specifications . 291, 293
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 265
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 213
................Emergency Wrecker . 285
....Equipment and Accessories . 215
.............................................Tips . 217
.....................Weight Limit . 213, 214
.............................Trailer Loading . 213
......................Trailer Towing Tips . 217
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
......................Automatic . 239, 240
Checking Fluid Level,
...................................Manual . 242
..................Fluid Selection . 240, 241
..............Identification Number . 288
.............Shifting the Automatic . 203
..................Shifting the Manual . 200
.......................Starting the Engine . 199
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 199
................With a Dead Battery . 272
..............State Emissions Testing . 300
........Steam Coming from Engine . 274
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 73
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 76
.......Steering Wheel Buttons . 171, 175
...................Stereo Sound System . 124
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 262
........................................Sun Visor . 101
........................Sunglasses Holder . 102
Supplemental Restraint System
......................................Servicing . 30
.........................SRS Indicator . 28, 58
...................System Components . 21
..................................Synthetic Oil . 233
Index
INDEX
T
IX
０５／０７／２８ １４：０９：２０ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３１８
Main Menu
＊
＊＊
＊
＊
＊＊
...................................Treadwear . 294
...................Treadwear Indicators . 257
.......................................Trip Meter . 64
................................................Trunk . 81
..................................Cargo Net . 196
....................Emergency Opener . 81
.........................................Hooks . 196
.................................Opening the . 81
.............Open Monitor Indicator . 61
....................................Turn Signals . 69
.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii
................Warning Button, Hazard . 71
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 51
....................Warranty Coverages . 303
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 238
........................Level Indicator . 60
.....................................Operation . 68
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 73
............Alignment and Balance . 257
..........................Compact Spare . 264
...............................Nut Wrench . 266
...................................Replacing . 258
Windows
...............................Auto Reverse . 92
..................Operating the Power . 91
...........................Rear, Defogger . 72
Windshield
.......................................Cleaning . 68
...................Defroster . 111, 115, 120
.......................................Washers . 68
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 252
.....................................Operation . 68
....................................Worn Tires . 257
.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 285
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 263
..Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 294
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 184
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 235
......................Using a Booster Seat . 47
................................Vanity Mirror . 101
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 194
.............Vehicle Dimensions . 290, 292
....Vehicle Identification Number . 288
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
...................................System . 211
........VSA System Indicator . 62, 211
...VSA Activation Indicator . 62, 211
.........................VSA Off Switch . 212
.............................Vehicle Storage . 262
.....................................Ventilation . 110
.................................................VIN . 288
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 233
...........Voice Control System . 117, 149
:U.S.only
: Canada only
Index
V
W
U
X
０５／０７／２８ １４：０９：２８ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３１９
Main Menu
5-speed manual transmission:
6-speed manual transmission:
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):Manual Transmission Fluid:
Power Steering Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
SpareTirePressure:
17.09 US gal (64.7 )
4.4 US qt (4.2 )
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see
pages and ).
Capacity:
2.0 US qt (1.9
)
2.3 US qt (2.2
)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Honda Manual Transmission
Fluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30
or 10W-40 motor oil as a
temporary replacement (see
pages and ).
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm
)
Rear:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
Front:
30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm
)
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
4-cylinder models
6-cylinder models Front:
Rear:
Front:
Rear:
All V6 models
232
240 241
242 243
245
244
Canadian 4-cylinder LX
All 4-cylinder models except
Canadian LX
０５／０７／２８ １４：０９：５２ ３１ＳＤＰ６３０ ０３２０
Main Menu
